JP6676680B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines are provided with lighting means for illuminating the inside of a housing, and can appropriately and quickly perform work in the housing even when installed in a game hall with dark lighting.

JP 2007-97982 A

It has been necessary to provide lighting means, lighting control means, and the like for lighting inside the housing.
In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving workability in a gaming machine installation environment with a simple configuration.

  In order to achieve the above object, the following gaming machines are provided. The gaming machine has a liquid crystal display device disposed with the display unit facing the front side, a first substrate disposed on the rear side, and disposed on the rear side with a gap from the first substrate. A second substrate to be formed. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal panel, a backlight serving as a light source for the liquid crystal panel, and a housing for housing the backlight while allowing the liquid crystal panel to face from a front opening. The housing includes a slit that leaks outgoing light from the backlight to the back side at a position facing a gap between the first substrate and the second substrate.

  According to one aspect, in a gaming machine, workability in a gaming machine installation environment can be improved with a simple configuration.

It is a perspective view showing an example of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the composition of the production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a collective display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of a main process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a main process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a winning number counter field of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the starting opening switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a hard random number acquisition process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure starting port 1 switch processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure reservation information judging processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 1 game processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 2 game processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of Tokatsu 1 usual processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special process 2 usual process of the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure 1 change start process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure 1 change start process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of the special figure 2 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure 2 change start process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the flow chart of the change start information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a change start information setting process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a high probability change frequency update process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of special figure 1 change processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure 1 changing process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of special figure 2 change processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of special figure 2 change processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 1 display process shift setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing shift setting processing 1 during special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing shift setting processing 2 during special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of special figure 1 display processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure 1 displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 displaying process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure 2 displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of an external information editing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the main processing in the production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the reception command analysis processing in the production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view showing an example of a game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a game control device of a 2nd embodiment, and an attachment base which supports a game control device with a front frame. It is a figure showing an example of AA section of a game control device of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the game control board of a 2nd embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted in a game control board. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of a game control board of a 2nd embodiment, and the direction of a resistor mounted in a game control board. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the game control board of a 2nd embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the game control board of a 2nd embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board. It is a figure (the 5) which shows an example of the game control board of a 2nd embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted in a game control board. It is a figure showing an example of display of a resistance mounted on a game control board of a second embodiment and a corresponding part number. It is a figure showing an example of the components provided in the component mounting surface of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control board of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted in a game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control device of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment, and the attachment base which supports a game control device with a front frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control board of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted in a game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control board of the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment, and the direction of the resistance mounted in a game control board. It is a figure showing an example of arrangement relation of an integrated circuit, a connector, and a resistor on a game control board of a 3rd embodiment, and a direction of a resistor mounted on a game control board. It is a figure showing the example of setting of line TL of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the component arrangement | positioning area | region and non-component arrangement | positioning area | region located between the integrated circuit and connector on the game control board of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of AA section of a game control device of a modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the part number display of the modification of a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a part number display according to a modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a status display device as a display means of a base and a storage area for the base. It is a figure showing the example of a display by a state display. It is a figure showing an example of the game control device of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the front and back of a game control board of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the information display field of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the information display field of modification 1 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the information display field of modification 2 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the information display field of modification 3 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the front and back of a game control board of modification 4 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of modification 4 of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the information display field of modification 5 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of modification 6 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the front and back of a game control board of modification 7 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the front and back of a game control board of modification 8 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the information display field of modification 8 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of modification 8 of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the front and back of a game control board of modification 9 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a game control device of a fifth embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a test circuit arrangement area, a test connector arrangement area, an input signal circuit arrangement area, and an input signal connector arrangement area of a game control board (no components mounted) according to the fifth embodiment. is there. The figure which shows an example of the test circuit arrangement area | region of the game control board (component mounting at the time of a test) of 5th Embodiment, the test connector arrangement area | region, the input signal circuit arrangement area | region, and the input signal connector arrangement area. It is. The figure which shows an example of the test circuit arrangement area | region of the game control board (component mounting at the time of mass production) of 5th Embodiment, the test connector arrangement area, the input signal circuit arrangement area, and the input signal connector arrangement area. It is. It is a figure showing an example of a power supply pattern and a ground pattern in which a bypass capacitor of a fifth embodiment is installed. It is a figure showing an example of the appearance of the board and harness of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an outline of two boards arranged in a horizontal direction, and a harness which connects two boards of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an outline of two boards arranged in the lengthwise direction of a 6th embodiment, and a harness which connects two boards. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline of the harness which connects two board | substrates which the connector orientation of 6th Embodiment differs, and a connector does not oppose, and connects two board | substrates. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline of the harness which connects two board | substrates which has a large offset but the connector does not oppose, although the direction of a connector of 6th Embodiment matches, and which connects two boards. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of two boards in which the orientations of the connectors match each other but only part of the connectors face each other due to an offset, and a harness connecting the two boards according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an outline by side observation of a substrate and harness of modification 1 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an outline by side observation of a board and harness of modification 2 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an external appearance of an external information terminal board of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of external appearance of an external information terminal board of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the operation state of the external information terminal of a 7th embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an arrangement example of external information terminals and other components according to a first modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of arrangement of external information terminals and other components according to a first modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of arrangement of the photocoupler of 1st modification of a 7th embodiment, and a resistor. It is a figure showing an example of an external appearance of an external information terminal board of modification 2 of a 7th embodiment. It is a perspective view showing an example of a game machine of an eighth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a liquid crystal display of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the cross section which passes through one of the lower slits in a liquid crystal display device, a game control device, and an effect control device. It is a figure showing an example of cable routing of a game control device of an eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of appearance at the time of observation of the game control board of modification 1 of the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the slit irradiation object of the modification 2 of the 8th embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, and the like are built in, decoration and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, and the like are notified of abnormal colors (for example, A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. When an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

  Also, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (reservoir plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided an option setting section 25 for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a decision button switch 25b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 causes the player's operation to intervene based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b. Can be performed. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened includes an effect in a fluctuating display game (decorative special figure fluctuating display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on the display 41 can be operated, or the identification information in the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  On the right side of the option setting unit 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation is performed to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to play a game ball 32 on the front of the game board 30. (See FIG. 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30 respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. In other words, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In a region (display region) where an image on the display screen can be displayed, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to a game such as a character that produces a special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for an effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating is provided on an upper portion of the center case 40. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (general symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. A game ball that has won the general-purpose starting gate 34 (a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  Two general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is provided on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of a special variable winning device 38 described later. The winning opening 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning prize port 36 forming a first start prize port (start prize area) for giving a start condition of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, the normal variation winning device 37 (which provides a start condition of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game), which is located below the normal figure starting gate 34 and on the right portion of the center case 40, (First start winning opening, start winning area). The normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting port 1) includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling to the right and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow. Reference numeral 37b denotes a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball is almost vertical at all times and a game ball cannot flow into the closed state. When the result of the normal-floating display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) serving as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side is tilted rightward, and the normal fluctuation display game is performed. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for a player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that it is also possible to make it possible to win even when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, and to make it harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric accessory (a normal electric).

  On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a down flow path 91 through which game balls can flow is formed, and game balls that have not won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 flow down through the down flow path 91. A start winning port 92 is provided at a lower portion of the downflow path 91, and a guide section 93 is provided at a lower portion of the downflow path 91. The guide portion 93 has an upper surface 94 formed as an inclined surface that is lowered to the left, receives a game ball that flows downward without winning in the starting winning prize port 92 on the upper surface 94, and has a special variable winning device 38, which will be described later. It is designed to guide you toward.

  The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (start winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure changing display game (special figure 2 changing display game). The winning game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the starting winning opening 36 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (lower winning opening, large winning) that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. Mouth 1) 95 is provided. The special fluctuation winning device 95 has an opening / closing member 95c, and the opening / closing member 95c closes the special winning opening depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game (closed state disadvantageous to the player). The opening / closing member 95c converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) that can be received. That is, the special fluctuation winning device 95 includes a special winning opening (lower winning opening, lower winning opening 1) that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 95c driven by a special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. During the small hitting game state (second special game state) based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, the large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state so that the game balls flow into the large winning opening. In this case, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening is provided. .

  Also, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable prize winning device (upper prize winning opening, large prize winning) which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. Mouth 2) 38 is provided. The special fluctuation winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening / closing member 38c closes the big winning opening (unfavorable for the player). The open / close member 38c retreats from the (closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is receivable. In other words, the special variable winning device 38 includes a special winning opening (a large winning opening, a special winning opening 2) that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by a special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. During the big hit game state (first special game state) based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, or the small hit game state (second special game state) based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game During the game, the special winning opening is converted from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the special winning opening, and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. In addition, inside the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening is provided. .

  When there are a plurality of special winning ports, as in the present embodiment, about one or two large special winning ports are provided, and a total of x special winning port switches 38a are provided (see FIG. 3). In the case of the first embodiment, the special variable prize winning device 95 serving as the first special variable prize winning device (lower prize winning port, large prize winning port 1) is provided with only one large prize winning switch 38a. On the other hand, the special variable prize winning device 38 serving as a second special variable prize winning device (upper prize winning opening, large prize winning opening 2) includes a plurality of (for example, two) large prize winning switch 38a. The special fluctuation winning device 95 is a winning device (so-called mini attacker) having a small winning opening smaller than the special fluctuation winning device 38, for example.

  A warp port (warp inlet) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the ball is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located immediately above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warping exit 39b can easily win the starting winning opening 36.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, of the gaming area 32 in which the game balls flow, the left area of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. It has been. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the starting winning opening 36, the special variable winning device 95, the general winning opening 35 (the right of the special variable winning device 38). (Except for the general winning opening 35 in the section), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), a general figure starting gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37, and a special variable winning. It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38 or the like.

  Further, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, which are the special figure change display game, and the general figure start gate 34 are provided. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game triggered by winning, and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a general symbol display unit. 55, a general-purpose hold display section 56, and a state display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the control system of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It comprises a data bus 140 and the like.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The operation clock and timer interrupt of the game microcomputer 111 and a reference of a random number generation circuit are provided. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock signal is provided. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32 V, DC 12 V, and DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 400. Enabled.

  The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. A power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the occurrence or recovery of the power failure.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, May be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal By providing the generation unit 430, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the exchange target.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, a built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32 V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410 and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a set value change switch 126 and a set key switch 127. The setting value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch, and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 is capable of changing settings related to the game performance, and retains the settings stored in the RAM even during a power failure or after power-off. For example, the game control device 100 can change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to six-stage settings.

  The game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting change mode in which the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, in the setting change mode, the game control device 100 enables the setting 1 to the setting 6 to be changed cyclically by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying a set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LED and is mounted on a substrate.

  In addition, the game control device 100 shifts the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be confirmed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. . For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability set value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

  The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, and the like) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a fluctuation pattern table for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the effect contents, the presence / absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as the starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes an outlier variation pattern table selected when the result is out of order, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, when a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed, This refers to a display state in which the derived display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be a reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of “no reach” <“normal reach” <“special 1 reach” <“special 2 reach” <“special 3 reach” <“premier reach”. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for solenoids and display devices to play the game machine. 10 is controlled overall. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generation circuit for generating random numbers for determining a variation pattern for determining reach and non-reach variable display, including a running time of a variable display game, and a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game. And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock for giving an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Have.

  Further, the CPU 111A obtains any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111 </ b> A determines the game result (win (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability). State), the operating state (time saving operation state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of stored memories, and the like, and selects one of the fluctuation pattern tables from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. To get. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the gaming machine 10. , And controls to pay out the prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit of the ball rental machine attached to the gaming machine 10 and performs control for paying out the ball rental. .

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 1 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, a starting port 2 switch 92a in the starting winning port 92, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and has a negative logic of 11V high level and 7V low level supplied from these switches. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a signal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 also receives a detection signal of a panel radio sensor 62 that detects emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10. In the proximity I / F 121, the input range is set to 7V to 11V, so that the leads of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited improperly, the sensors and the switches are disconnected from the connector, and the leads are disconnected. It is configured to detect an abnormal state such as a floating state and output an abnormality detection signal.

  To explain the winning opening switch 35a, the winning opening switch 35a is shown as one block in FIG. 3, but actually (N) winning opening switches 35a (three in this embodiment). Are provided on the game board 30, and respective signals are input to the proximity I / F 121 through different signal lines. Further, in FIG. 3, the special winning opening switch 38 a is shown by one block, but actually, a plurality (X) of special winning opening switches 38 a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30. Have been. Then, the plurality of special winning opening switches 38a are connected by different signal lines, respectively, or a wired OR (not shown) on a relay board (not shown) existing between the switch and the game control device 100 (main board), for example. It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 to be described later may be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be connected to the game control device 100 in a wired-or manner.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the starting port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 38a are output to the second input port 123. Is input to Note that the signal output (output from the proximity I / F 121) of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the starting port switches of FIG. 1, is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like, and a glass frame opening detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the like. 63, a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on a front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of a setting value change switch 126, a detection signal of a setting key switch 127, a RAM initialization. The detection signal of the activation switch 112 is input.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111. I have.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC from the power supply device 400. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 asserts an enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding an address assigned to the second input port 123 (to an effective level). Change), it can be read. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (fullness)), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). Based signal) and an out ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out ball is detected), and The first input port 122 is provided for supplying the emissions 111.

  The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge channel (not shown) between an outlet (not shown) for discharging a game ball (out ball) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out ball detection switch signal is used to calculate a game performance (for example, a base) per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out balls), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the state display device 135. The out ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300. In this case, the out ball detection switch signal may be used for determining a game effect or an operating state that is a trigger for switching to a customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display game performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

  The gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, so that the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 to be output to the test test apparatus is turned off. It is configured to be. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special design information of the variable display game to the trial shooting test device of the accredited institution (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control cannot be performed is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus. It has become.

  The output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 to open / close data of a special winning opening solenoid 38b that opens and closes an opening / closing member 38c of a special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), and a movable member 37b of a normal variable winning device 37. A first output port 134a is provided for outputting opening / closing data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening and closing the power supply, and display data of the status display device 135. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting display data of the probability set value display device 136. The output unit 130 further includes a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50; And a fourth output port 134d for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 134e for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. Can be supplied to an external device via a photo relay. A part of the information to be supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, the fifth output port 134e also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to an opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the ordinary solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a is provided to the output unit 130. , A second driver 138b for outputting an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 134c, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 134d. A third driver 138c for outputting an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and an external information signal supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 134e or the fourth output port 134d to the external information terminal board 71. The fourth driver 138d for outputting, the display of the status display device 135 for outputting from the first output port 134a Fifth driver 138e is provided for receiving a data signal to generate a drive signal for status display device 135 outputs.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. The status display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the status display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. .

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 490. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided. Not provided.

Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of the effect control device according to the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied in case of a power failure. A ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM 311 a for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command (production command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 on the reproduction sound, and decorates the lamp. , Turn on the motors and solenoids, and control the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also connected to the VDP 312 are an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used to develop and process image data of characters and the like read from the image ROM 325. Have been.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are input as well.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) system. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier or the like for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The output sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), the glass frame 15 and the like. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the effect device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. Good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and an enter button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect character switch for detecting an initial position and the like of a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the 47 (production motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 for main control. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives the motor and the solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, it is supplied from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and to the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like. And reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, a circuit board configuring the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub-control board (also referred to as a sub-board).

The settings in the gaming machine 10 may be taken as follows to take countermeasures against fraud.
(1) The game control device 100 executes a process of forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 when the setting is changed. This prevents the gaming machine 10 from performing game control over different set values.

  (2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 at the time of setting change and setting confirmation. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify an externally connected device (for example, an information disclosure device such as a hall computer or a call lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device that has input the security signal can notify that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed by a notifying unit (a lamp, a sound (including a sound), or the like). Note that the game control device 100 may output a common security signal for setting change and setting confirmation, or may output a security signal that can distinguish between setting change and setting confirmation.

  (3) The game control device 100 is housed in a board box and attached to the back side of the front frame 12. The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed board box, except that required operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, and the like are exposed to the outside. As a result, the main medium (the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like) which is a trigger for changing the setting or confirming the setting is protected by the sealed board box. In addition, the game control device 100 exposes the setting key switch 127 to the outside, and a required operation unit (the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 is sealed by a board box. It may be something to protect.

  (4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key by making the operation of the setting key switch 127 indispensable for access to the main medium (the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like) which is a trigger for changing the setting or confirming the setting. Eliminate third-party access to primary media. Note that the game control device 100 may be configured to enable access to required operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control device 100 may be configured to enable physical operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 by operating the setting key switch 127 (for example, opening / closing an operation window) or setting. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 may be electrically or logically enabled by operating the key switch 127, or may be a combination thereof.

  (5) The game control device 100 includes a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) and a required information display unit (status display device 135, probability set value display device 136). Is controlled by the game microcomputer 111. Note that the game control device 100 may include an error release switch used for error release and a game start switch for giving a game start opportunity, and the error release switch and the game start switch are also controlled by the game microcomputer 111. It may be.

  (6) The game control device 100 determines four power-on states from the combination of the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the game control device 100 sets a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is set to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Is forcibly initialized, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the power is turned on and the power is restored (power recovery).

  (7) In the setting change state, the gaming machine 10 can change the settings in the following steps. The setting key is inserted with the setting key switch 127 turned off while the power is off (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). When the power is turned on (power switch ON) while the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed (ON), the setting is changed (step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed each time the setting value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). By operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, the set value is determined and the setting change state is terminated (step 5).

  At this time, the setting change is notified in steps 3 and 4 by notification means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, and light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). At 5, the RAM clear is notified. Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs the security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops the output of the security signal in step 5. Note that the game control device 100 executes the RAM clear in step 3 prior to the RAM clear notification in step 5. That is, the game control device 100 prioritizes the notification of the setting change over the notification of the RAM clear, thereby promptly notifying the user of the change in the set value, thereby improving the effect as an anti-fraud measure. The probability set value display device 136 turns off the light in steps 1 and 2, displays the set values in steps 3 and 4, and turns off the light in step 5. The state display device 135 turns off the light in steps 1 to 4 and displays the base value in step 5. In the gaming machine 10, the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 may be provided integrally. For example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability set value display device 136. In that case, the state display device 135 turns off the light in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and displays the base value in step 5. In addition, the game state of the game control device 100 is before the game is started in steps 3 and 4, the game is started in step 5, and the game is in progress thereafter.

  (8) In the setting check state, the gaming machine 10 can check the settings in the following steps. The setting key is inserted with the setting key switch 127 turned off while the power is off (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). When the power is turned on (power switch ON) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting is confirmed (step 3). By operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state ends (step 4).

  At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by the notifying means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (sound) by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs the security signal in step 3 and stops outputting the security signal in step 4. The probability set value display device 136 turns off the light in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and turns off the light in step 4. The state display device 135 turns off the light in steps 1 to 3 and displays the base value in step 4. In the gaming machine 10, the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 may be provided integrally. For example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability set value display device 136. In that case, the state display device 135 turns off the light in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and displays the base value in step 4. Note that the game state of the game control device 100 is before the game is started in step 3, the game is started in step 4, and the game is in progress thereafter.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can change the settings and confirm the settings only before starting the game when the power is turned on. Thus, the gaming machine 10 eliminates setting changes and setting confirmations during the game, and facilitates operation guarantee during the game.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging the hit of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, and reads the ROM 111B. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and a process of judging a hit or miss of the ordinary figure change display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is changed and displayed on the general symbol display unit 55 of the collective display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a general symbol changing display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of the normal symbol change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display unit 55, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control executing unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). In the case where the result of the ordinary figure change display game is out of place, control is performed to display the outcoming result mode on the ordinary figure display section 55.

  In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36 and the starting port 1 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored. Based on the start memory, a process of extracting a random number value for judging a big hit in the first special figure change display game and comparing it with a judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine a hit in the first special figure change display game. Perform In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 92a provided in the start winning port 92, and based on the start memory, the big hit determination disturbance of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. A process of extracting a numerical value and comparing the extracted value with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine a hit in the second special figure change display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination result of the first special figure change display game or the second special figure change display game to the effect control device 300. I do. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 of the collective display device 50 for a predetermined period of time, a process of displaying a special figure variation display game to stop and display is performed. Perform In other words, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning regions (start winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, start winning opening 92). The game control means.

  Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing for setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control apparatus 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process of generating a special game state or a small hitting game state (ie, a process of executing a special game or a small hitting game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state due to the result of the first special figure change display game or the second special figure change display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A, for example, uses the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b to execute the special change winning device. The opening and closing member 38c of the opening 38 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening 2. In this special game state, the CPU 111A determines whether, for example, a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins in the special winning opening 2 or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the special winning opening 2. The opening of the special winning opening 2 until the condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) that continues (repeats) the predetermined number of rounds is performed. Further, in the process of generating the small hitting game state due to the small hit as a result of the first special figure change display game (special figure 1 change display game), the CPU 111A uses, for example, the special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b. The opening and closing member 95c of the special fluctuation winning device 95 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening 1. Further, in the process of generating the small hitting game state due to the small hit as a result of the second special figure change display game (special figure 2 change display game), the CPU 111A uses, for example, the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b. The opening and closing member 38c of the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening 2. The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the special winning opening performed in the small hitting game state is such that, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec is performed four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of order, the CPU 111A performs control to display a result mode of the out of place on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game results in the high probability state, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change game Both of the variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, based on the result of the special figure change display game, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state. In this time-saving state, the probability of being a winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is set to a high probability (general-figure high-probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general-figure low-probability state). Is possible. Thereby, the opening time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable prize device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to “0” so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the general-figure variation display game (normal-figure variation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the general-figure stop time for displaying the result of the general-figure variation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec × 1 time), The opening time of the second hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the opening time of the third hit symbol (normal time of opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 3 times).

  It should be noted that the execution time of the general-float display game, the general-figure stop time, the number of times of the general-figure release, and the general-figure release time are set so that the general-figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 are controlled to reduce the working hours. For example, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-mentioned general-purpose variable display game (the general-purpose variable display time) to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (Eg, 10,000 ms equals 1000 ms). Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds is set). 704 ms). Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the general fluctuation display game being hit, the release time (normal power release time) is changed to the second state in the normal state (low normal probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The number of times (for example, four times) can be set to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of being a hit result of the general-figure change display game (general-figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal-figure low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible to set a probability (normal high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the time-saving state, the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the ordinary figure fluctuation time, the ordinary figure stop time, the number of ordinary electricity open times, the ordinary time open time, and the ordinary figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated. The time saving state can also be referred to as a general power support state (during general power support or during power support).

  Also, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game control device 100 sets the second special figure change display game (special figure 2 change) after the end of the time-saving state generated by the predetermined big hit (after the end of the electric support). It is possible to generate a special figure 2 special mode (specific result high probability state that increases the probability that the second special figure variable display game has a specific result) in which the probability that the result of the display game is a small hit is increased, for example, for a prescribed period. I have. This special mode 2 special mode is a kind of high probability state.

  Next, an outline of the game characteristics (a standard strategy) of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming property of the gaming machine 10 is such that a left hit is performed in the normal gaming state (the state other than any of the special mode 2 in the special mode, the special game state, and the time saving state described above) to achieve a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game. In the special game state (big hit state) or the time saving state (during electric support), right-hand is performed. In the special figure 2 special mode, the right-hand is aimed at the small figure of the special figure 2 variable display game. When the special mode of the special figure 2 is completed and the normal game state is reached, the game returns to the left-handed mode. By providing the special mode 2 as described above, there is a possibility that the player can maintain a higher sense of expectation than the normal game state even after the time-saving state is over, and the interest of the game is improved. I do.

  Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The collective display device 50 performs various state displays according to the lighting modes of the seven-segment LED_d1, the seven-segment LED_d2, and the LEDs_d3 to LED_d18.

  The batch display device 50 distributes various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 And a special figure 2 symbol display section 54, a general figure display section 55, a general figure hold display section 56, a state display section 57, and a special figure 2 hold display section 58. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting modes of the four LEDs LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special figure 1 hold display section 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display section 53 displays a symbol in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d1. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of the eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The general symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the general symbol game by a lighting mode of three LEDs, LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The general-purpose reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the general-purpose game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game by the lighting mode of the three LEDs LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the value of a register or the like is saved at the start address of the region when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the high order. In step S4, 00h at the head of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a sub control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as a main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of data held in the RAM area. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be controlled. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the RAM initialization switch may be operated from power-on until the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  Next, after performing a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), measuring a standby time and monitoring occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). Perform First, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on is set. A determination is made (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not been continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine 10 waits for the power to be shut off. . In this manner, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and to appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so that backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value becomes “0”. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or an EEPROM is permitted (step S12). S13), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16).

  If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (Step S18), and the calculated checksum is calculated. It is determined whether or not the checksums at the time of power-off match (step S19).

  Here, in the checksum calculation processing performed in step S18 and step S43 described later, the sum of the data of the game control work area and the data of the state display work area may be calculated as a checksum, The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the work area for work and the data of the work area for state display, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the work area for game control. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in a storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

  Next, when the checksums match (step S19; Y), it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 previously read (step S20). If the initialization switch 112 is off (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), and a process is performed when the power is restored normally from the power failure.

  If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or if the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), The process shifts to S21, and in steps S21 to S24, an initialization process (first initialization process) when data is abnormal is performed. That is, the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RWM (data of all areas including the access prohibited area) based on the determination that the data in the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) is abnormal. The first initialization means performs the following.

  When the process proceeds to step S21, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S21), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared to zero (step S22). ), The RAM access prohibition area is set to prohibit access (step S23). Next, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area having a value other than the value (zero) written in step S22 of the game control work area and the state display work area as an initial value, and in the present embodiment, This is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration and the setting of the effect mode.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), and initialization processing at the time of the initialization operation is performed (step S27, S28). 2 initialization processing). That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores the data (for example, the RAM 111C) stored in the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. A second initializing means for initializing the data of an area not including the access prohibited area is formed.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), the data of the game control work area in the storage area (area not including the access prohibition area) of the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) is cleared to zero (step S27). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration and the setting of the effect mode in the present embodiment.

  As described above, the game control device 100 according to the first embodiment performs an initialization process when data is abnormal (first initialization process) and an initialization process during initialization operation (second initialization process). (First initialization means and second initialization means), so that an optimal and lean initialization process according to the situation can be realized.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S25), and the special figure status (set in the special figure status area described later). The power failure recovery command corresponding to the state indicated by the data) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S26), and the process proceeds to step S31.

  Here, the areas to be initialized in step S25 are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. In step S25, the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to receive a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Is set to an undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  In the case of the first embodiment, in step S26, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information are transmitted. Note that the screen designation command means that the control state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both in normal processing (during the change, during the big hit (first special game state), and during the small hit (the first 2) is a command for instructing display of a customer waiting demonstration screen, and otherwise, a command for instructing display of a recovery screen.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S24 or S28 to step S29, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S29), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed, and a predetermined A plurality of commands such as a time (for example, 30 seconds) command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 by a frequency dividing circuit, and outputs a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. A CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how to change the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and store the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition). is there. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value random number, The initial value (start value) of the winning symbol initial value random number, the winning initial value random number, and the winning symbol initial value random number is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), and an interrupt is permitted (step S34).

  Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which is an initial value of a random number (big hit symbol random number) which determines a big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is a small hit stop of the special figure. It is a random number that is an initial value of a random number (small hit symbol random number) for determining a symbol. Further, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number (hit random number) that determines a hit in the ordinary figure varying game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” determines a winning symbol in the ordinary figure varying game. It is a random number that is an initial value of a random number (hit symbol random number). It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in a model having no small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

  In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on. By setting the (start value), the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it becomes difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (Step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. This initial value random number updating process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, “+1”. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuously updating the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

  Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit random number, the small hit random number, the hit random number, and the hit random number are This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a processing unit. Also, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. "Has been adopted. Each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by “+1” or “−1”, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S35 includes a method of performing an initial value random number updating process also in a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both methods are used. In order to avoid the execution of the initial value random number updating process, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. In the case where the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing as in the embodiment and is performed only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily inhibiting interruption (step S39) is performed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off (step S43) and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44), access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the processing (step S45), the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the slave control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) for performing various controls in accordance with the instructions from the main control means Etc.), when the power is turned on, the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device. Device 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an operation of the initialization operation unit. And an initialization unit (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation state, and reads the operation state of the initialization operation unit before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, a timer interrupt process of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs in the above-described main process from when an interrupt is issued to when the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S121). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and fetching of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S123) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S124) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, and general-purpose solenoid 37c). ). When a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the firing permitting signal is set to a state where it can be set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no signal processing or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device 100, and is a second signal (a firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device 200. Are also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the firing control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step S125) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (Step S126), and a random number update process 2 (Step S127) are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. . The random number update process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  Thereafter, the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 38a shown in FIG. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed (step S128). In addition, a starting port switch monitoring process (step S129) for monitoring winning of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a, a special figure 1 game processing (step S130a) for performing processing related to a special figure 1 variable display game, The special figure 2 game processing (step S130b) for performing the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game and the general figure game processing (step S130c) for performing the processing related to the general figure variable display game are performed.

  In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 serving as the first starting winning port or the starting winning port 92 serving as the second starting winning port, various random numbers are generated. (A random number such as a big hit) is extracted, and a game result preliminary determination is made before the start of the special figure variation display game, in which a game result based on the winning is determined in advance.

  Next, a segment LED (for example, an LED such as the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50) which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and displays a special figure change display game and various kinds of information relating to the game is displayed as desired. Is displayed (step S131), a magnet fraud monitoring process for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step S132), and a panel radio wave sensor 62 The radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) for performing a process of checking whether the detection signal is normal by checking the detection signal is performed. Then, an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (step S134) and a status display editing output process for status display (step S135) are performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt. This is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of the timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout command transmission processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the winning number counter area according to the first embodiment.

  First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. The winning number counter area 1 includes, for example, three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and fourteen prize ball counters as shown in FIG. The winning number counter can store up to 65535 winning. Next, the winning number counter area 2 includes, for example, three winning ball counters, ten winning ball counters, and fourteen winning ball counters as shown in FIG. 10, and each winning number counter can store up to 255 winnings. It has become. In checking the count number of the winning number counter area, the address of the winning number counter area is updated in step S202 or the like described later, and the above-described counters are checked in order from the top (three prize ball counters).

Next, in FIG. 9, the left column is a process of updating (increase) the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 10, the counters of the plurality of winning number counter areas 2 provided for the number of winning balls (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not the check target counter has a count number other than “0” (step S201). If there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the check of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed. It is determined whether or not (step S203).

  If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the counter in the target winning number counter area 2 is decremented (updated by "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter is counted. The number of payouts corresponding to the address of the area 2 (for example, any of the three, ten, and fourteen described above) is obtained (step S205). Next, the value of the prize ball remaining area is added to the payout number (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is equal to or more than "0" (step S209; Y), the main award ball signal output frequency is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining award ball number area. (Step S211).

  In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described below, a process of outputting a main prize ball signal based on the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal updated in step S210 is performed. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) every 10 payout schedules, and 10 payouts from the payout substrate (payout control device 200). One pulse is output every time.

  Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not greater than or equal to "0" (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set, and the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0”. , No subtraction is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213). If it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213; Y), It is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) include “during payout operation”, “ball lending operation”, “shot ball out error”, “overflow error”, “frame radio wave illegal occurrence "Medium", "Abnormality of paid-out ball detection switch (switch for monitoring the paid-out ball)", "Insufficient payout error", "During excessive payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of acquired game balls remaining) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

  Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether the check of all areas has been completed (step S217). If the checking of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, if the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the address of the winning number counter area 1 is updated. The corresponding payout number command is obtained (step S219), and the obtained command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S213; N), when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). If it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas has been completed (step S217; Y), or if the processing of step S221 has been completed, the payout command transmission processing ends.

  It should be noted that the payout command is not transmitted every time the timer interrupts, but is transmitted after a predetermined period of time, as can be seen from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing step S215 and subsequent steps depending on the determination results in steps S213 and S214. Before sending. The transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side can pay out the prize ball.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, the count switch) corresponding to the two large winning opening switches 38a (count switches) in the upper winning opening (special variable winning device 38). (Data indicating the number of the port to which the detection signal is input and the bit position of the signal in the port, etc.) are prepared (step S271). Next, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (step S272). .

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to one large winning opening switch 38a in the lower winning opening (special variable winning device 95) is prepared (step S273), and whether there is an illegal winning is monitored and normal. A fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a winning (step S274) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the public telephone is prepared (step S275a), and an unauthorized / winning monitoring process (step S275a) monitors whether there is an illegal winning and detects a normal winning. Step S275b) is executed.

  Next, the winning opening switch which does not require the fraud monitoring process, that is, the winning opening switch which can always win (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 92a, winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35). A table is prepared (step S276), a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (step S277) is performed, and a special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process (step S278) is further performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which one of the plurality of switches and signals for monitoring the error state of the gaming machine 10 to be monitored this time is set to “0”. Is updated in the range from to (3) (step S279). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any one of a switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of a connector disconnection of the switch, a shot ball out error from the dispensing control device 200, an overflow error from the overflow switch, and a dispensing abnormality error. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting an error monitoring based on a crab as a target is prepared (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S281) is performed.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting monitoring of an error based on any of the glass frame opening, the body frame opening, the frame radio irregularity, and the touch switch is prepared. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S283) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284). If the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring is performed. The process ends. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the disconnection of the switch connector or the like according to the value of the state scan counter. A gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the game machine as a target is prepared (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S286) is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process ends. Note that the payout busy signal check processing is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed at a period of 16 ms.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step S129) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start-up switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a winning monitoring table of the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a prize (Step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting port 1 (step A103; Y), the gaming state is a predetermined state in which the right-handed game should be performed (for example, a normal power support state, a big hit, etc.) It is determined whether or not there is (Step A104).

If it is determined in step A104 that it is not the predetermined state in which the right-hand operation should be performed (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processing is performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state is to be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the effect command setting processing (step A106) Perform That is, in the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the winning opening 1 hardly wins unless the player is left-handed, except for the normal electric power support state, and the starting opening 1 is awarded in a predetermined state to be right-handed. In this case, it can be estimated that the player has left-turned in a predetermined state in which right-handing should be performed. It is configured to do this.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the starting port 1 (step A107), a special figure starting port 1 switch process (step A108) is performed.
Next, a winning monitoring table for the starting port 2 (start winning port 92) is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the start-up opening 2 (step A111; N), the start-up switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the starting opening 2 (step A111; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the ordinary power support state (time saving state) (step A111). A112), if it is determined that it is not in the normal power support state (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (step A113). If it is determined in step A113 that the big hit has not occurred (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure change display game is in the final change of the Toden support (step A114).

  In step A114, if it is determined that the final power support is not in the final change (step A114; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and effect command setting processing (step A116) is performed. In other words, if it is not in any of the general power support state, during the big hit, or during the final change of the general power support, the vehicle should be left-handed. Therefore, a process of transmitting a left-hand instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

  If it is determined in step A112 that it is in the general power support state (step A112; Y), if it is determined in step A113 that a big hit is in progress (step A113; Y), the general power support is finalized in step A114. When it is determined that it is fluctuating (Step A114; Y), and when the process of Step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to Step A117.

  In step A117, after preparing a table for setting the information on suspension by the start-up opening 2 (step A117), a special-drawing start-up opening 2 switch process (step A118) is performed, and the start-up switch monitoring process ends.

  If it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the start-up opening 2, for example, before executing step A112, the general electric fraud (even though the normal variable prize device 37 is closed) A step is provided for determining whether or not there is a fraud in which the winning in the variable prize winning device 37 is detected. If it is determined that this is a normal power fraud, the startup port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and subsequent steps. The configuration may be such that the second start memory (start memory of FIG. 2) is not generated any more in the event that there is an irregularity in ordinary power.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition process, first, the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set out of the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37) and the starting port 2 (starting winning port 92) ( (Step A121), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A123). A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting ports 1 and 2, the winning entry information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing ends.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting port 1 switch process (step A108) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure starting port 1 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 1 switch processing is performed when there is an input of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (start winning prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, a starting port signal 1 output, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is output to a management device external to the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start-up port signal 1 output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135 by passing step A134. In the first embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal 1 output count area. When the loaded value is "255", when the value is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the to-be-updated special figure 1 hold number (the number of start storages in the special figure 1) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). If the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure starting port 1 switch process ends. If the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for distributing a prefetch fluctuation pattern) is set ( (Step A136), the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is updated by “+1” (step A137).

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (the random number storage area for the special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A138), and the big random number prepared in step A125 is stored in the big random number storage area of the RWM. (Step A139). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

  Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. The corresponding RWM is saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A143), and the special figure suspension information determination processing (step A144) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations to be monitored is prepared (step A145), effect command setting processing (step A146) is performed, and the special figure start-up 1 switch processing ends. .

  Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and executes the special figure variable display game. And a starting winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory which is an execution right. In addition, the starting winning storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random numbers extracted based on winning of the game ball in the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37) in the first starting up to a predetermined number. Store as memory.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (step A118) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 2 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the starting port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (start winning prize of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure starting port 2 switch process, first, the starting port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 92a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded ( (Step A151), the loaded value is updated by “+1” (Step A152), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (Step A153). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output number area of the RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), the process passes step A154 and shifts to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal 2 output count area. When the loaded value is "255", when the value is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 reservations (startup storage) to be updated corresponding to the monitored start-up opening 2 switch 92a is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4) (step A155). If the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A155; N), the special figure starting port 2 switch processing ends. If the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A155; Y), a special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting variation information (for example, for distributing a prefetch variation pattern) is set ( (Step A156), the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is updated by "+1" (Step A157).

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (the random number storage area for the special figure 2) corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure 2 is calculated (step A158), and the big random number prepared in step A125 is stored in the big random number storage area of the RWM. (Step A159). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted and prepared (step A160), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A161).

  Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted and prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the fluctuating pattern random number 1, the fluctuating pattern random number 2, and the fluctuating pattern random number 3 are stored. The corresponding RWM is saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A163), and the special figure suspension information determination processing (step A164) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations to be monitored is prepared (step A165), effect command setting processing (step A166) is performed, and the special figure start-up 2 switch processing is completed. .

  Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start winning port 92, and starts the game as a right to execute the special figure change display game. A starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as storage. In addition, the starting winning storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 2 (starting winning port 92) as a second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure holding information determination processing (step A144, step A164) in the above-described special figure starting port 1 switch processing and special figure starting port 2 switch processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure suspension information determination process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In the special figure suspension information determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game is a high probability state (high probability medium) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the probability is high (step A172; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that it is not during the high probability (step A172; N), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that a big hit is in progress (step A173; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A173 that the big hit is not occurring (step A173; N), the big hit determination processing for determining whether or not the big hit is based on whether or not the big random number value matches the big hit determination value (step A173). Step A174) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A175). If the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (in other words, the special figure type; the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 type) is read. It sets (step A176), acquires the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 (step A177), shifts to the process of step A184, and performs the subsequent processes.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a big hit (step A175; N), a small hit determination process (step A179) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do it. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step A180; N), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A183), and the process proceeds to step A184 to perform the subsequent processes.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162 is set. Is set (step A182), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and effect command setting processing (step A184). A185) is performed. Next, special figure information setting processing (step A186) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game (step A187). Perform

  Then, a prefetch variation pattern corresponding to the first variation number indicating the first variation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second variation number indicating the second variation pattern (variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. The command is prepared (step A188), the effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure suspension information determination process ends.

  The special figure information setting processing in step A186 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing (special figure 1 ordinary processing or special figure 2 ordinary processing described later). The processing is the same as the above. That is, when the special figure suspension information determination processing is executed in step A144, the special figure type is the special figure 1, and the processing in steps A186 and A187 is performed in the special figure 1 information setting processing and the special figure 1 variation described later. When the special figure pending information determination processing is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2 and the processing in steps A186 and A187 is the same as the special figure 2 information described later. The setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process are the same.

  By the above processing, the look-ahead stop design command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are generated. Prepared and transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, to change the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) It forms a pre-judgment means. In addition, the timing at which the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning game in which the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the fluctuation display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (step S130a) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 game process, monitoring of the input of the special winning opening switch 38a, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, and display of the special figure 1 (identification information that is variably displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game). Make the settings for In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is during a big hit or a small hit (big hit game state or small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game) (step A1). . If the special hit 2 is not during the big hit or the small hit (step A1; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 and the special variable winning device 95 is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step A1; Y) and when the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). Note that the minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is “0” (step A4). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

  In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the special setting are performed. The special figure 1 usual processing (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation in FIG. 1 is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “1” in step A7, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display is performed. A process during one change (step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big hit of each big hit The special figure 1 displaying process (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. The processing during the fanfare / interval to be performed (step A11) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “4”, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for performing a process of setting information necessary for performing the remaining sphere process is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is not the last round, the information necessary for performing the fanfare / inter-interval processing is set, etc. For example, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, a process for setting information required for performing the special figure 1 big hit ending process, and the like, a special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13). Do it.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "6" in step A7, special figure 1 big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined special winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. A small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the small hit operation transition processing, the command setting of the small hit end screen, the setting of information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Is performed (step A16).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "9" in step A7, small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 small hit end processing is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "10" in step A7, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol variation control processing (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special figure game processing is performed. To end. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processing Perform

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and the special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

[Special figure 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game process (step S130b) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 game process, the input of the special winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 2 (identification information that is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game) is displayed. Make the settings for In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 is in progress (the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the result of the special figure 1 change display game) (step A31). . If it is not during the big hit or the small hit in the special map 1 (step A31; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 and the special variable winning device 95 is performed.

  Next, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit in the special map 1 is being performed (step A31; Y) and when the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, the process proceeds to step A33. If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A33). Note that the minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, when the time has elapsed or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (Step A35). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0” (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by “−1” (step A36), and the special figure 2 is updated in the RWM. The long-variation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

  On the other hand, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A35; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number The table is set in the register (step A38), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step A39). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A47).

  In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is “0”, the start of the change of the special figure 2 change display game is monitored, and the setting of the change start and the effect setting of the special figure 2 change display game are performed. FIG. 2 performs a special map 2 usual process (step A48) for setting information necessary for performing the process during fluctuation.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” at step A47, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display is performed. 2 During fluctuation processing (step A49) is performed.

  In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big hit of each big hit A special figure 2 displaying process (step A50) for setting a fanfare time according to a winning opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing a fanfare / interval process is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “3” in step A47, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. The processing during the fanfare / interval to be performed (step A51) is performed.

  In step A47, if the special figure game processing number is “4”, an interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the jackpot round is the last round, or a special winning opening remains A special winning opening processing (step A52) for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "5" in step A47, if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, etc. For example, a special winning opening remaining ball process (step A53) for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit ending process is performed. Do it.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "6" in step A47, the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step A54) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 usual processing is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “7” in step A47, the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined special winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. The small hit fanfare middle processing (step A55) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.

  In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “8”, the small hit operation transition processing, the command setting of the small hit end screen, the setting of information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are performed. Is performed (step A56).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "9" in step A47, small hit remaining ball processing (step A57) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 small hit ending processing is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "10" in step A47, the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step A58) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 (step A59), the symbol variation control processing (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is performed, and the special figure game processing is performed. To end. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0” in step A34 (step A34; N), that is, if the time is not up, or if the processing of step A37 is completed, The processing shifts to the subsequent processing.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step A8) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special process 1 usual process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 usual processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to change (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 change display game can be started) (step A251). In this determination, the game state is a period from the end of the change of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 (start of the processing during the display of the special figure 2) to the end of the hit operation (the big hit game state or the small hit game state). In other words, when the special figure 2 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start the change, and when it is not the period, the special figure 1 is determined to be the start of the change.

  When it is determined that the special figure 1 can start to change (step A251; Y), it is determined whether or not the left-handing instruction has been notified (that is, the left-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and then the right-handing instruction is issued). It is determined whether or not the notification command has not been transmitted (step A252). In step A252, if the left-handing instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handing instruction has been notified. If the left-handing instruction notification flag has not been set, it is determined that the left-handing instruction has not been notified. A configuration may be used.

  If the left-turn instruction has not been notified (step A252; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), an effect command setting process (step A254) is performed, and a left-turn instruction notification flag is set (step A252). A255).

  If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step A252; Y), and if step A255 has been completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and the number of reserved special figure 1 (first start storage number) is “0”. It is determined whether or not it is (step A256). If it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 1 is not “0” (step A256; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state of the special figure change display game is prepared (step A257), and the production command A setting process (step A258) is performed, a special figure 1 change start process (step A259) is performed, a decoration special figure reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is prepared (step A260), and an effect command setting process (step A260). A261) is performed, and information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) is set (information addition) in the special figure status area in the RWM (step A262), and the probability of the special figure changing display game is set. It is determined whether the state is high probability (step A263).

  The special figure status area includes information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) and information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed). These areas are stored independently of each other, and the state indicated by the information set in the special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status is in one of the states “special figure 1 is changing” and “special figure 1 is changing + special figure 2 is changing”.

  In the special figure 1 change start processing (step A259), processing (1), which is the processing number related to the special figure 1 change processing, is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (steps A318 and A319 described later), The process of saving the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), the processing of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (steps A307 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. .

  If it is not during high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not it is during high probability final fluctuation (step A264). If it is not during high probability final fluctuation (step A264; N), special processing is performed. A change check flag in FIG. 1 is set (step A265). The determination as to whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed is made based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed.

  Then, when the step A265 is completed, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability final change is in progress (step A264; Y), the special figure is used. A 1-variation process shift setting process (step A266) is performed, and the special map 1 ordinary process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot be started to change (step A251; N), and if the special figure 1 reservation number is “0” in step A256 (step A256; Y), “0” is set (step A267), and the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area which is an area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in the RWM (step A268). (1) Normal processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A251 is affirmative, and if the number of reserved special figure 1 is not “0”, the special figure 1 change start process (step A259) and the like are executed. Even if the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 change display game is being executed), the special figure 1 change display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the first start memory to the variable display game based on the second start memory. The control means can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Tokuzu 2 usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step A48) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special process 2 usual process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 usual processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 change display game can be started) (step A271). In this determination, the game state is a period from the end of the change of the hit (big hit or small hit) in Toku-zu 1 (start of the processing during the display of Toku-zu 1) to the end of the hit operation (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state). In other words, when the special figure 1 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start the change, and when it is not the period, the special figure 2 is determined that the change can be started.

  Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 can start to change (step A271; Y), it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the special figure 2 (the second start storage number) is “0” (step A272). . If it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 2 is not "0" (step A272; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A273), and the production command Perform setting processing (step A274), perform special figure 2 change start processing (step A275), and set information indicating that special figure 2 is changing (executing the special figure 2 change display game) in the special figure status area in the RWM. (Information addition) (Step A276), and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game is high probability (Step A277).

  Here, the state indicated by the information set in the special figure status area (that is, the special figure status) indicates that “special figure 2 is changing” and “special figure 1 is changing + special figure 2 is changing” when step A276 is executed. ”.

  In the special figure 2 change start processing (step A275), a processing number “1” related to the special figure 2 change processing is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (steps A348 and A349 described later), A process of saving the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352 described later), a processing of setting a fluctuation time as a value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A337 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. .

  Note that, for example, after executing step A275, a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared, then the effect command setting processing is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step A276 (that is, the special figure 2). Also, the configuration may be such that the decoration special figure reservation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the usual processing).

  If it is not high probability (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not it is high probability final fluctuation (step A278). If it is not high probability final fluctuation (step A278; N), special processing is performed. FIG. 2 sets a fluctuation check flag (step A279).

  The case where the step A279 is completed, the case where it is determined that the high probability is being performed (step A277; Y), and the case where it is determined that the high probability final change is being performed (step A278; Y) are as follows. The process change setting process during 2 fluctuations (step A280) is performed, and the special map 2 usual process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is “0” (step A272; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is “0” (step A281), and the special figure 1 reservation number is determined. If it is determined to be "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 change display game is being executed) (step A282). If the special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A283). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step A283; N). ) Sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and effect command setting processing (step A286) is performed. Note that a command (here, a customer waiting demonstration command) prepared when the effect command setting process is performed is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  When the step A286 is completed, when it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot be started to change (step A271; N), when the special figure 1 reservation number is not “0” (step A281; N), When FIG. 1 is changing (step A282; Y) and when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A283; Y), “0” is set as the processing number (step A287), and the RWM The processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number (step A288), and the normal processing of the special figure 2 is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the determination in step A271 is affirmative, and if the number of reserved special figure 2 is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A275) and the like are executed. Even if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 change display game is being executed), the special figure 2 change display game is started. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The control means can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step A259) in the above-described special figure 1 ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 change start process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 change start process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the first special figure change display game (special figure 1 change display game). In the special figure 1 change start processing, first, a special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure change display game starts. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A302) for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A303) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 Is performed in a special figure 1 information setting process (step A304) to set various kinds of information relating to the setting of the change pattern of the first special figure change display game. A setting information table is prepared (step A305). Thereafter, a special figure 1 change pattern setting process (step A306) for setting a change pattern that is a change mode in the first special figure change display game is performed, and change start information setting for setting information of a change start of the special figure change display game is performed. The process (step A307) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game is high probability (step A308).

  If it is not high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether it is high probability final fluctuation (step A309). If it is not high probability final fluctuation (step A309; N), special It is determined whether or not FIG. 2 is changing (the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) (step A310). When the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A311). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0” (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, “4” or more (step A312). When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer in FIG. 2 is not equal to or more than “4”, for example (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

  Note that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is determined by a time value (for example, 60000 msec) sufficient for the special figure 2 game processing timer to be within a 2-byte range in a change start information setting process in step A337 described later. It is set to “0” (for example, see step A500 described later).

  Further, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (the execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, in step A313, the result of multiplying the timer value (for example, 60,000 milliseconds) for long variation saved in step A37 described above by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is multiplied by the special figure 2 game processing at that time. By adding the value of the timer area, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 can be calculated.

  Further, when the timer value for the length change is, for example, 60000 ms (= 60 seconds), the fact that the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more means that the remaining change time of the special figure 2 is 240 This is longer than the second (= 4 × 60 seconds) and longer than the longest fluctuation time of Toku-zu. In this case, it is not necessary to execute Steps A315 and A316, which will be described later. A312 is provided. Therefore, the numerical value of “4” in step A312 is a numerical value for determining in advance whether the remaining fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 by the number of repetitions of the Toku-zu 2 game processing timer. This is just one example.

  Next, when Step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (Step A311; Y), the processing shifts to Step A314 and the special figure 1 to be started from now on. (For example, the fluctuation time set in step A306) is the remaining fluctuation time of the currently changing special figure 2 (the calculation result in step A313 or the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is zero) It is determined whether the time is shorter than the time determined by the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer) (step A314).

  If the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer is prepared (step A315). ), Effect command setting processing (step A316).

  Next, when the game is in the high probability (step A308; Y), when the game is in the high probability final change (step A309; Y), and when the special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), the special figure 2 game is performed. When the number of repetitions of the processing timer is, for example, “4” or more (step A312; Y), when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; Y), and step A316 Is completed, the flow shifts to step A317 (FIG. 22).

  In step A317, a high probability variation count update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 is an area for storing the special figure 1 game process number in the RWM. The processing number, that is, “1” is saved in the game processing number area (step A319), and the customer waiting demonstration flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demonstration flag in the RWM, is cleared (step A320). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of the special figure 1 change (the special pattern 1 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and a changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area of the RWM ( Step A322), the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area of the RWM (step A323), The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the FIG. 1 change (step A324), and the special figure 1 change start process is ended. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 1 changing in step A324 is to start the variable display of the special figure 1 from a blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step A275) in the above-described special figure 2 ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure change display game (special figure 2 change display game). In the special figure 2 change start processing, first, a special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure change display game starts. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A332) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 2. A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern which is a table in which information for setting various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set by performing a special figure 2 information setting process (step A334). A setting information table is prepared (step A335). Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting information of a fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A337) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game is high probability (step A338).

  If it is not high probability (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not it is high probability final fluctuation (step A339). If it is not high probability final fluctuation (step A339; N), special processing is performed. It is determined whether or not FIG. 1 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 1 changing display game) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is changing (step A340; Y), the remaining change time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). Note that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

  Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuating time of the special figure 2 to be started from now (for example, the fluctuating time set in step A336) is changed. It is determined whether or not it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (the calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

  If the change time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining change time of the special figure 1 (step A344; N), a command for notifying that the change time of the special figure 2 is longer is prepared (step A345). ), Effect command setting processing (step A346).

  Next, if it is during high probability (step A338; Y), if it is during high probability final fluctuation (step A339; Y), if special figure 1 is not fluctuating (step A340; N), When the fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time in Tokujin Figure 1 (Step A344; Y), and when Step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to Step A347 (FIG. 24).

  In step A347, a high probability variation count update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 is an area for storing the special figure 2 game process number in the RWM. The processing number, that is, “1” is saved in the game processing number area (step A349), and the customer waiting demonstration flag area in which the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the RWM is cleared (step A350). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 change (the special pattern 2 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and a changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area of the RWM ( Step A352), the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area of the RWM (step A353). The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the FIG. 2 change (step A354), and the special figure 2 change start process ends. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 in step A354 is to start the variable display of the special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, the details of the change start information setting processing (steps A307 and A337) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the change start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random number 1, the change pattern random number 2, and the change pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491). If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491; Y), the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number of the special figure 1 are determined. 2, and clears the information (for the reserved ball 1) of the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random number 3 (step A491a). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A491; N), the information of the random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step A491). A491b).

  Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step A494), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step A495).

  Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is used as the target special figure game processing timer area (that is, during the setting of the special figure 1 information, the special figure 1 game processing timer area, While the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the information is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A497).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long change of the special figure 2 is started (step A498). A499), if it is not the start of the long change of the special figure 2 (step A499; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the area for storing the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer in the RWM) is displayed. "0" is saved (step A500).

  On the other hand, if it is the start of the long change of the special figure 2 (step A499; Y), “9” is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498; Y), when the processing of steps A500 and A501 is completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

  In addition, in order to fluctuate the time that is not enough for the 2-byte special figure game processing timer, the number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set for the long fluctuation of the special figure 2. If, for example, 60000 ms is set as the addition result in step A496 in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 and “9” is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (the above-described step A33) The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is decremented, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is decremented by 1 in the step A36, and 60000 ms is added to the special figure 2 game processing timer area in the step A37. Set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is 60000 ms × 10 in this embodiment, which is a fluctuation time of 10 minutes. Actually, since it is a timer interrupt of 4 ms, it is possible to set up to about 262 seconds in 2 bytes. However, for the sake of easy understanding, a case where it can be expressed by a multiplication of 60 seconds is described as an example.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step A502, data (MODE) of a variation command corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A502), and data (ACTION) of a variation command corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A503). ), Effect command setting processing is performed (step A504).

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. Thereby, the effect command including the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. The same applies when the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”, like an effect command, but may be configured in a larger byte configuration. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multiple-byte configuration may be used.

  Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A505), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is set. Is updated to "-1" (step A506), the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 is set, and the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), and the information of the free area after the shift is cleared. (Step A508), and ends the change start information setting process.

  On the other hand, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the reserved number of the special figure 2 is updated by “−1” (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set. Then, the random number storage area at the address is shifted (step A507a), the information on the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the change start information setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information about the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the above-described effect command setting process, and the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the information about the start of the special figure change display game, The detailed effect contents in the decoration special figure variation display game are set according to the determined variation pattern, and the decoration special figure variation display game is executed. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A variation command including a pattern-related information (which may be referred to as a variation pattern command or the like) is exemplified. For example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. .

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high-probability variation count update process (steps A317 and A347) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the high-probability-change-times updating process according to the first embodiment.

  In the high-probability-variation-number updating process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special-figure variation display game is high (step A551). If the special-figure display game is not high probability (step A551; N), , The high probability change frequency update process ends.

  When one of the types of the special figure variable display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is in the big hit game state, the hit probability of the other variable display game is always controlled to a low probability, but one of the small variable display games is controlled to a small probability. In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

  If the high probability change is in progress (step A551; Y), the high probability change count for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A552), and the high probability change is performed. It is determined whether the number of times is “0” (step A553).

  If the number of times of high probability change is not “0” (step A553; N), the process of updating the number of times of high probability change is ended. If the number of times of high probability change is "0" (step A553; Y), a signal relating to the end of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A555). Note that the signal regarding the high probability end is a signal for turning off the two big hit signals.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving (no high probability & time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the ordinary figure, the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

  Then, the numbers with low probabilities are saved in the game state display number area (step A557), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559), and the symbols (figure The high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 is set (step A560), and the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process ends.

  The high-probability final fluctuation flag includes information that can determine the type of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that is the high probability final fluctuation. Also, in the high-probability final fluctuation, the internal probability becomes low at the start of the fluctuation, so the information indicating that the fluctuation started during the high-probability even during the low-probability now is the high-probability information. This is a probability final fluctuation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the case of the high-probability final fluctuation, the probability state (the setting state in the game control device 100) of the target special figure is returned to the low probability at the start of the fluctuation. Thereby, when the game ball wins the starting port during the special figure change, which is the last round in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent a problem that the hit determination for the starting winning is determined with a high probability.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the above-described special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 changing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 changing process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of outputting the symbol determination number is updated by “+1” (step A571), and the command (decorative special figure 1 including the information of the stopped symbol for special figure 1) is changed from the decorative special figure 1 command area. Command) is loaded and prepared (step A572), and effect command setting processing (step A573) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (symbol stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), an effect command setting process (step A575) is performed, and a high probability final change flag is determined according to the state of the high probability final change flag. It is determined whether there is a change (step A576). If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is changed to the current special figure 1 fluctuation display game. (Step A577), and when the probability is the high probability final fluctuation (Step A576; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of the current special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The setting is performed (Step A578), and the process proceeds to Step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579, for example.

  In addition, as an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. In some cases, the display time is set to 2000 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 136 ms. The display time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

  Next, when the flow shifts to step A579 (FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not the current (currently executing) special figure 1 variable display game is lost based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 1 setting process. (Step A579) In the case of a loss (Step A579; Y), the flow proceeds to Step A594, and in the case of no loss (Step A579; N), the special figure 2 is also currently changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (Step A580).

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is fluctuating is performed based on any of the information of the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, and the information of the special figure 2 change control flag area. Can be. In other words, the configuration may be such that it is determined to be changing if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, or it is determined that the state is changing if special figure 2 is changing in the special figure status area. A configuration may be adopted, a configuration may be adopted in which a change is determined if the in-flight flag is saved in the special-figure 2 variation control flag area, or a configuration may be used in which a combination of these conditions is used.

  If the special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step A581), and the special figure 2 displaying process is not being executed. In this case (step A581; N), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination times is updated by “+1” (step A582).

  Next, when step A582 is completed and when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step A581; Y), the display time of the current special figure 1 (the time set in step A577 etc.) is set. For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A583), and the display time of the special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A584). If the special figure 2 has already started the stop display by the processing of steps A583 and A584, the display time of the special figure 2 will be reset. The display time of the special figure 2 is basically extended by this resetting, but may be shortened in some cases.

  Thereafter, a command (decorative special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and effect command setting processing (step A586) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (symbol stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), an effect command setting process (step A588) is performed, and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A588) is performed. A589).

  According to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the current special figure 1 variable display game in which the decorative symbols are to be stopped and displayed is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure changing at the same time 2 will be forcibly terminated.

  Next, when step A589 is completed and when the special figure 2 is not changing (step A580; N), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A590). Then, it is determined whether or not the current special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (step A591).

  If it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), the information (the special figure 1 round number) from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is used to control the big hit game after the end of the special figure 1 change. The special figure 1 round number upper limit information for determining the upper limit value is loaded and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A592), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening information area to open the big winning opening. The data is saved in the information area (step A593).

  Next, when the current special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (step A579; Y) and when the special figure 1 variable display game is small hit (step A591; Y), step A593 is ended. In this case, the process moves to step A594. When the process proceeds to step A594, information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594), and processing shift setting processing 1 during special figure 1 display (step A594) A595), and the special figure 1 changing process ends. In the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  As described above, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game. When the variable display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 terminates the variable display game based on the second start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the above-described special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 30 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 changing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 changing process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of output of the symbol determination number is updated to “+1” (step A601), and a command (decorative special figure 2 including information of a stopped symbol for special figure 2) is entered from the decorative special figure 2 command area. Command) is loaded and prepared (step A602), and effect command setting processing (step A603) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (symbol stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), an effect command setting process (step A605) is performed, and a high probability final change flag is determined according to the state of the high probability final change flag. It is determined whether there is a change (step A606). If the final variation is not the high probability final variation (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is changed to the current special symbol 2 variation display game. (Step A607), and when the probability is the high-probability final fluctuation (Step A606; Y), the display time at the time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of the current special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The setting is performed (Step A608), and the process proceeds to Step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609, for example.

  In addition, as an example of the display time of the special figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. In some cases, the display time is set to 600 ms, and even when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. The display time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step A609 (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the current (currently executing) special figure 2 variable display game is out of order based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 2 setting process. (Step A609) In the case of a loss (Step A609; Y), the process proceeds to Step A624, and in the case of no loss (Step A609; N), the special figure 1 is also currently changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (Step A610).

  It should be noted that whether the special figure 1 is changing or not is determined based on any one of the information of the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, and the information of the special figure 1 change control flag area. Can be. In other words, the configuration may be such that it is determined that the state is fluctuating if “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, or it is determined that the state is fluctuating if the state of special figure 1 is changing in the special figure status area A configuration may be adopted, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation is determined if the in-flight flag is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area, or a configuration in which a combination of these conditions is used may be adopted.

  If the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (step A611), and the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed. In this case (step A611; N), the number of times of output of the symbol determination number is updated by “+1” (step A612).

  Next, when step A612 is completed and when the special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A611; Y), the display time of the current special figure 2 (the time set in step A607 or the like) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (step A613), and the display time of the special figure 1 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A614). In the case where the special figure 1 has already started the stop display by the processing of steps A613 and A614, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of Toku-zu 1 is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

  After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including information on the stop pattern for special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and effect command setting processing (step A616) is performed. Next, an ornament special figure 1 stop command (symbol stop command for the special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), an effect command setting process (step A618) is performed, and a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A618) is performed. A619).

  According to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, if the present special figure 2 variable display game in which the decorative symbols are to be stopped and displayed is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure changing at the same time The variable display of 1 is forcibly terminated.

  Next, when the step A619 is completed and when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A610; N), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A620). Then, it is determined whether or not the current special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (step A621).

  If it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), information (special figure 2 round number) from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is used to control the big hit game after the end of the special figure 2 change. The special figure 2 round number upper limit information for determining the upper limit value is loaded, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A622), and the information is loaded from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area to open the special winning opening. The data is saved in the information area (step A623).

  Next, the case where the current special figure 2 variable display game is missed (step A609; Y) and the case where the current special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (step A621; Y), the step A623 is ended. In this case, the process proceeds to step A624. When the process proceeds to step A624, information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the process shift setting process 1 during special symbol 2 display (step A624) A625), and terminates the special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  As described above, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 constitutes means for ending the variable display game based on the first start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step A595) in the above-described special figure 1 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, a processing number relating to the special figure 1 display processing “2” is set as the processing number (step A631), and the processing is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A632).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). The signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal.

  After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( Step A634), the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting processing 1 (step A625) in the above-described special figure 2 changing processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 process-in-display process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set as the processing number (step A641), and the processing is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A642).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). The signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

  After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area ( Step A644), and end the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A619) in the above-described special figure 2 changing processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In the special figure 1 display change processing 2, when the special figure 2 variable display game which started the change is a hit, the special figure 1 variable display game which has been changing at the same time is forcibly ended with a forcible disconnection. This is the process for causing That is, this is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and forcibly stopped.

  In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set as the processing number (step A651), and the processing is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A652).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). The signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal.

  After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( (Step A654), the lost stop symbol pattern is saved in a stop symbol pattern area (an area for storing the stopped symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A655). In this stop symbol pattern area, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (a stop symbol pattern depending on an extracted random number) is usually already set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the running special figure 1 variable display game. (In some cases) is saved, but in this case, even if the saved stop pattern is a hit, the pattern is forcibly rewritten to a lost stop pattern. Similarly, in steps A656 to A661 following this routine, even if there is data once set in a regular step, the data is cleared or reset for forced termination at the outset.

  Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (area storing the special figure 1 round number upper limit information in the RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (the special figure in the RWM). The area for storing the one-large winning opening information is cleared (step A657), and the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area of the special figure 1, and are information on whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit or a big hit. The information is set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and the information is reset here.

  Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step A660), the stop symbol number for the special figure 1 stop symbol area is saved (step A661), and the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting processing 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 2 display in progress process setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step A589) in the above-described special figure 1 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In the special figure 2 display change processing 2, when the special figure 1 variable display game which started the change is a hit, the special figure 2 variable display game which has been changing at the same time is forcibly ended with a forcible disconnection. This is the process for causing That is, this is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and forcibly stopped.

  In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set as the processing number (step A671), and the processing is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A672).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). The signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

  After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area ( (Step A674), the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in a stop symbol pattern area (an area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A675). In this stop symbol pattern area, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (a stop symbol pattern depending on the extracted random number) is usually already set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process for the running special figure 2 variable display game. (In some cases) is saved, but in this case, even if the saved stop pattern is a hit, the pattern is forcibly rewritten to a lost stop pattern. Similarly, in steps A676 to A681 following this routine, even if there is data once set in the normal step, the data is cleared or reset for forced termination at the outset.

  Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (area for storing the special figure 2 round number upper limit information in the RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (the special figure in the RWM). The area for storing the two special winning opening information is cleared (step A677), and the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area of the special figure 2, and information of whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a big hit The information is set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the information is reset here.

  Next, the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step A680), the special symbol 2 stop symbol area is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number (step A681), and the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 ends. .

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process (step A10) in the above-described special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the processing during special figure 1 display according to the first embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 displaying process of the first embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 displaying process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is stored. Clear (step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step A703), and the information of the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A705). If it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit (the special figure 1) of the first special figure variable display game is performed. The signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling command is prepared (step A707), and the effect command setting processing (step A708) is performed, and the number of rounds is performed. An upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal that turns on the signal per special symbol. Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (for example, “16” or “4” in the case of the first embodiment; "8" or "2" may be obtained) and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. .

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on for a big hit other than the 2R sudden hit, turned on for a 2R sudden big hit during high probability, and turned off for a 2R sudden big hit during low probability. The three big hits are turned on when a big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is turned on, turned off when a 2R sudden hit during a high probability is set, and turned on when a 2R sudden hit during a low probability.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big win opening information is set (step A717), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A717). (Step A718), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize port (special fluctuation winning device 38) (step A719).

  If it is a big jackpot opening big jackpot (step A719; Y), the information of the big jackpot opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A720), and the outside of the illegal monitoring period flag is placed in the upper jackpot opening illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A721), and the flow shifts to step A724.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big win of opening the upper winning opening (step A719; N), the information of the lower winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A722) and illegal monitoring is performed in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A723), and the routine goes to step A724.

  When the process proceeds to step A724, the process number is set to 3 (step A724), the process number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A725), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A725) A726), and terminates the special figure 1 displaying process.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A705 (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727). If it is determined that a hit has occurred (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not a high probability final variation is occurring (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A728; Y), the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is changed to the normal probability state ( A probability information command relating to information to be set to the low probability state is prepared (step A729), and effect command setting processing (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in a power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A731), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A731). A732). Step A732 assumes a mode in which the right-handed instruction is issued in the high-probability state, and clears the right-handed instruction notification flag since the high-probability state is ended after it is determined as the high-probability final change. An example is shown. However, when the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handed instruction is not notified in the high probability state, the step A732 is deleted (or the left-handed instruction is notified in the high probability state, and the left-handed instruction is notified in step A732). A configuration in which a flag is cleared) is also possible.

  Next, when step A732 is completed and when the high-probability final variation is not in progress (step A728; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A733), and the effect command setting processing (step A733) A734). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and an effect command setting process (step A736). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be left-handed (for example, a state in which the general power support state is not in the big hit or the special mode) (step A737).

  In step A737, when it is determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; Y), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-displayed LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A739), and the flow proceeds to step A742.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left (step A737; N), a signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740). The signal related to the right strike instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the right-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A742.

  When the process proceeds to step A742, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit for opening the upper winning prize port (special variable winning device 38) (step A742). If it is a small hit of opening the big winning opening (step A742; Y), the information of the big winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A743), and the outside of the illegal monitoring period is displayed in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. The flag is saved (step A744), and the flow shifts to step A747.

  On the other hand, if it is not a small hit of opening the upper winning opening (step A742; N), the information of the lower winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A745), and the information is displayed in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. The flag outside the monitoring period is saved (step A746), and the flow shifts to step A747.

  When the process proceeds to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing ends. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting processing, the special figure 1 game processing number area saves “7” as the processing number, and the special figure 1 game processing timer area stores the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms). ) To save.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A748).
Then, when it is determined in step A748 that the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A748; Y), the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state ( A probability information command relating to information to be set to the low probability state is prepared (step A749), and effect command setting processing (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in a power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A751), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A751). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hitting (during a big hit or a small hit) (step A753). Step A752 is only an example assuming a mode in which a right-handed instruction is notified in the high probability state, as in step A732 described above.

  Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is not winning (step A753; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( (Step A754) In order to extinguish the display LED during the right strike, the number in the left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A755). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is hitting (during a big hit or a small hit), the game is aimed at the upper winning prize opening (the special variable prize winning device 38) which is opened at that time. In order to hit the ball, if Toku-zu 2 is hitting (step A753; Y), the process goes to step A756 by passing steps A754 and A755. Also, when Step A755 is completed, the process proceeds to Step A756.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step A756, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) in the special figure status area in the RWM is cleared (information subtraction) (step A756). The processing number related to the ordinary processing of the special figure 1, that is, “0” is saved in the processing number area (step A 757), and the processing for displaying the special figure 1 is ended. When step A756 is executed, the special figure status is either the state in which only special figure 2 is changing or the state in which neither special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is changing.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (step A50) in the above-described special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process of the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process of the first embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating a flowchart of the processing during special figure 2 display according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process is loaded (step A761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM is stored. Clear (step A762).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step A763), and the information of the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A764). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A765), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A765; Y), the big hit (the special figure 2) of the second special figure variation display game is performed. The signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling command is prepared (step A767), the effect command setting processing (step A768) is performed, and the number of rounds is performed. An upper limit value table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit is a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal that turns on the signal that turns on the special symbol 2 Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “4”; “8” or “2” may be obtained) and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A770). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and effect command setting processing (step A773) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A774), and effect command setting process (step A775) is performed. .

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on for a big hit other than the 2R sudden hit, turned on for a 2R sudden big hit during high probability, and turned off for a 2R sudden big hit during low probability. The three big hits are turned on when a big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is turned on, turned off when a 2R sudden hit during a high probability is set, and turned on when a 2R sudden hit during a low probability.

  Then, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big win opening information is set (step A777), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A777). (Step A778), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize port (special fluctuation winning device 38) (step A779).

  If it is a big jackpot opening big jackpot (step A779; Y), the information of the big jackpot opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A780), and the unauthorized outside flag outside flag is set in the upper jackpot opening illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A781), and the flow shifts to step A784.

  On the other hand, when it is not a big win of opening the big winning opening (step A779; N), the information of the number of illegal winnings in the lower winning opening is cleared (step A782), and the illegal monitoring is performed in the lower illegal winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A783), and the flow shifts to step A784.

  When the process proceeds to step A784, 3 is set as the process number (step A784), the process number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A785), and the process transition setting process during the fanfare / interval (step A785) A786), and terminates the special figure 2 displaying process.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit in step A765 (step A765; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787). If it is determined that a hit has occurred (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not a high probability final variation is occurring (step A788).

  Then, in step A788, when it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A788; Y), the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state ( A probability information command relating to information to be set to a low probability state is prepared (step A789), and effect command setting processing (step A790) is performed. Subsequently, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in a power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A791). A792). Step A792 assumes a mode in which the right-handed instruction is notified in the high-probability state, and clears the right-handed instruction notification flag since the high-probability state is determined to be the high-probability final change and the high-probability state has ended. An example is shown. However, when the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handed instruction is not notified in the high-probability state, step A792 is deleted (or the left-handed instruction is notified in the high-probability state, and the left-handed instruction is notified in step A792). A configuration in which a flag is cleared) is also possible.

  Next, when step A792 is completed and when the high-probability final variation is not in progress (step A788; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A793), and the effect command setting processing (step A793) A794). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and an effect command setting process (step A796). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be left-handed (for example, a state in which the general power support state is neither the big hit nor the special mode) (step A797).

  If it is determined in step A797 that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A797; Y), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A802.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left (step A797; N), a signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A800). The signal related to the right strike instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the right-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A801), and the process proceeds to step A802.

  When the process proceeds to step A802, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the upper winning prize port (special variable winning device 38) (step A802). If it is a small hit of the opening of the big winning opening (step A802; Y), the information of the number of illegal winnings in the big winning opening is cleared (step A803) and the unauthorized monitoring period is set in the upper winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. The flag is saved (step A804), and the routine goes to step A807.

  On the other hand, if the small winning opening is not a small hit (Step A802; N), the information of the lower winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (Step A805), and the information is displayed in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. The flag outside the monitoring period is saved (step A806), and the routine goes to step A807.

  When the process proceeds to step A807, a special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process ends. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, processing for saving “7” as the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ) To save.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A808).
If it is determined in step A808 that the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A808; Y), the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is changed to the normal probability state ( A probability information command relating to information to be set to the low probability state is prepared (step A809), and effect command setting processing (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in a power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A811). A812), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in a big hit (step A813). Step A812 is only an example assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction is notified in the high probability state, as in step A792 described above.

  Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (step A813; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( (Step A814) In order to extinguish the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A815). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the middle of a big hit, it is in a state in which a right-handed shot should be made with the aim of the upper winning prize opening (the special variable prize winning device 38) opened at that time. If the special map 1 is in a big hit (step A813; Y), the process goes to step A816 by passing steps A814 and A815. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in a small hit, the state is to be left-handed in order to aim for the lower large winning opening (special variable winning device 95) opened at that time. If the special figure 1 is not hitting a big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is hitting a small hit), the process goes to step A816 after executing steps A814 and A815. However, the processing content regarding such a right-handed left-handed game varies depending on the board configuration and game characteristics of the gaming machine, and is merely an example. Here, also when step A815 ends, the process proceeds to step A816.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step A816, the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) in the special figure status area in the RWM is cleared (information subtraction) (step A816). The process number, ie, “0”, related to the normal processing of the special figure 2 is saved in the processing number area (step A817), and the processing for displaying the special figure 2 is ended. When the step A816 is executed, the special figure status becomes either the state where only the special figure 1 is changing or the state where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. 42 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning port switch / state monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio fraud monitoring process (step S133) On the basis of this, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

  In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to an error state or a security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame is set. The ON data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error are output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C71). C75), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not “0”, the security signal control timer is updated to “−1”. (Step C77). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (Step C78).

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the main processing described above and the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer, the time from when the security signal control timer expires ON data of the security signal is output as external information.

  Next, a magnet fraud is occurring (Step C80; Y), a panel radio fraud is occurring (Step C81; Y), a frame radio fraud is occurring (Step C82; Y), and a special winning opening fraud is occurring (Step C83; Y). If the abnormal change is occurring (step C84; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is output as the test signal. The data is saved in the data area (step C86). Similarly, even when the illegal use of the telephone is occurring, similarly, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) The configuration may be adopted.

  On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, panel radio fraud, frame radio fraud, ordinary telephone fraud, special winning opening fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has not occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is determined whether or not a switch abnormality of switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87). If no switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is output as a test signal. The data is saved in the data area (step C88).

  If any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C86). Here, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, switch abnormality, and the like are abnormalities monitored in the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing in the timer interrupt processing.

  Next, after the step C86 or C88 is completed, in the external information editing process, the winning signal (starting port 1 signal) of the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, which is the starting winning port of FIG. ) Is edited to edit the winning signal (starting port 2 signal) of the starting port 2 (starting prize port 92 which is the starting prize port of FIG. 2). A signal editing process (step C90) is performed. Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing a main prize ball signal relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination frequency signal is output based on the symbol determination frequency output frequency (symbol determination frequency signal output frequency). Is performed (step C92), and the external information editing process ends.

[Main processing]
Next, a main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the main process in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits the interruption.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initialization of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs an initial setting of the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interruption.

  [Step D15] The control unit permits display data generation. That is, the control unit permits a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument to be given to the srand function, or use a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. May be.

  [Step D17] The control unit initializes an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, the RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags to be described later in control processing of the effect control apparatus 300)). Save the initial value at power-on in).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes an effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at a high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button in the effect button input process, or may execute the process in a short period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes a hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process of setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 and the like.

  [Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating a pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using a rand function, for example. Since the rand function generates a random number each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain a random number only by executing the rand function. Note that a counter that increments by “1” like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit performs an effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. For example, the control unit sets the commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is processing for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing processing has been completed.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing, and if it is a frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26, and if not a frame switching timing, waits for a frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 sec ≒ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 sec) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing of arrival at the target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing by the VDP 312 is completed. The generation cycle of the V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or may be performed for less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

  By the determination processing of the frame switching timing, the subsequent processing (Steps D26 to D30 and the subsequent Steps D18 to D24) is executed at the frame switching timing in each of the processing cycles. It should be noted that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed on a frame basis (ie, on the processing cycle basis). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, it becomes 100 ms in three frames. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table form and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body including various motors and SOL (solenoid) (for example, the board effect device 44).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and renders in accordance with the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (ie, a predetermined number of rented balls)). This is a process for performing the mode correction.

  After executing Step D30, the control unit returns to Step D18, and thereafter repeats the processing of Step D18 to Step D30. That is, Steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (may be referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the activation of the effect control device 300.

  Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the effect of the screen, but the signals and data generated or set by these control processings (particularly, various LEDs and motors are controlled). The process of actually outputting the drive control signal to the port is performed in a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there may be a case where only a command is issued by serial communication or the like and a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, the received command check processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the received command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

  The reception command (production command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the production control device (main board) 100 transmits the production command to the production control device 300. Are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

  The process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by a "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed in a hardware manner (by the function of the CPU itself), and when a command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. Although it is only necessary to take out the command from the buffer, in the "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, a command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities, The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term “store” simply means that the information is stored in a predetermined storage area in a readable manner so as to be used for the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or the RAM 322) of the CPU 311. It is sufficient that the capacity of the command buffer is equal to or larger than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the processing cycle described above; for example, 1/30 second).

  [Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of received commands. The command reception counter is set in RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in step D43 in principle, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (the time corresponding to one processing cycle described above).

  [Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the command reception number is not “0 (zero)”. If the command reception number is not “0”, the process proceeds to Step D43, and if the command reception number is “0”. If so, the received command check processing ends. In the present application, "loading" data in the control processing as in step D41 means extracting data from the RAM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of the present example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of received commands.
Assuming that A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D41. Then, immediately after the execution of step D43, “A = AB = 0” is a normal movement. However, in the embodiment of the present example, the effect control device 300 interrupts the command reception from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without interrupt prohibition, the value of A may increase between the processing in step D41 and the processing in step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the count of the command is shifted, so that the subtraction process of “AB” is performed in step D43. I am doing it. However, when serial communication is used to transmit and receive commands from the main board as in the present embodiment, interrupts are prohibited and the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to “A ← 0”.

  [Step D44] The control unit stores the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, command data stored at an address corresponding to a read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to a command area (sometimes called a command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.

  [Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data of the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by, for example, “1” in the range of “0” to “31”. Do it. Note that the range from “0” to “31” corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

  [Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not step D44 and step D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to Step D47 when copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to Step D44 when copying is not completed.

  [Step D47] The control unit loads (ie, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first, of data that has not yet been read out of the command area, that is, data to be read next). I do.

  [Step D48] The control unit executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter, this command). The received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not analysis of commands for the number of received commands is completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 are repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to Step D47 when the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed, and ends the received command check processing when the analysis is completed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

  [Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of MODE and the lower byte of ACT of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process. Note that, in the case of a command of a variation system instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, upper byte data stored as MODE instructs a first half variation pattern, and lower byte data stored as ACT instructs a second half variation pattern. Things.

  [Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the MODE separated in step D51 is within a normal range. The control section proceeds to Step D53 when the value of MODE is within the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value of MODE is not within the normal range. Note that some MODE values are not defined and are not used, and if such values are not used, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not within the normal range.

  [Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to Step D54 when the value of ACT is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value of ACT is not in the normal range.

  The determination in step D53 as to whether the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and are separated into the upper and lower limits in step D53. It is checked whether the value of the obtained ACT is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the value is within the normal range (at this point, the missing tooth check described later has not been performed).

  [Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the separated ACT with respect to the value of the separated MODE is a correct combination. The control section proceeds to Step D55 when the value of ACT is a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value is not a correct combination. The determination as to whether or not the ACT value is a correct combination can be made using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in the match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, the combination is correct. It can be determined that they are not a combination.

  The determination as to whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination is executed including a missing check of whether or not the combination of ACT is normal with respect to MODE. For one MODE, there are a plurality of valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, some values do not exist discontinuously and some values are missing). Is checked to see if it is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is checked one by one whether or not they match.

  [Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes the variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

  Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). Further, a variation command (also referred to as a variation command or a variation pattern command) is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and a range in which data of the variation command can be taken is a variation command range.

  [Step D57] The control unit determines whether the MODE data is within the jackpot-related command range. When the MODE data is within the big hit command range, the control unit executes the big hit command processing (details omitted) (step D58). When the MODE data is not within the big hit command range, the control unit proceeds to step D59. . The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to the effect during the jackpot, and the range of data of the jackpot-related command is the jackpot-related command range.

  [Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol-related command range. The control unit executes the symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol command range. . A symbol-type command (also referred to as a symbol command or a decorative special command) is a command for instructing information on a symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to stop the special symbol). Is a symbol command range.

  [Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the one-shot command range. The controller executes the one-shot command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the one-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the one-shot command range. . Note that, unlike a command that has a meaning by a combination such as a symbol command and a variable command, a command that is established independently is called a single-shot command. The single command (sometimes called a single command) includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. The range that the data of this single command can take is a single command range.

  [Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range. When the MODE data is within the pre-reading symbol command range, the control unit executes the pre-reading symbol command processing (details omitted) (step D64). When the MODE data is not within the pre-reading symbol command range, the control unit performs step S64. Proceed to D65.

  [Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range. The control unit executes the prefetch variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the prefetch variable command range (step D66), and receives when the MODE data is not within the prefetch variable command range. The command analysis processing ends.

  Note that the pre-reading design-related command and the pre-reading variation command are commands for a pre-reading effect. When any of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 ends, the received command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning prize memory in which the variable display game of a special figure has not been executed (holding the start prize memory or simply holding). In order to notify the player in advance of whether or not a big hit will occur (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will occur) when the game is subsequently executed with a predetermined degree of reliability, a display of suspension of the start winning prize memory or the like is performed in a manner different from the usual manner. And so on. The pre-reading commands (pre-reading fluctuation-related commands and pre-reading design-related commands) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to suspension of a start winning prize memory to be subjected to a pre-reading effect. It is transmitted from control device 100 to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the components mounted on the board are oriented in a specific direction. First, a board arrangement environment in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a perspective view illustrating an example of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 47 shows a state in which the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame (main body frame) 11. In the gaming machine 10, the outer frame 11 is fixed to a game arcade facility generally called an island, and the front frame 12 is opened to allow a staff member to perform maintenance work. For this reason, the gaming machine 10 is excellent in maintenance workability in an installation environment on the open side of the outer frame 11 on the open side of the outer frame 11 that supports the front frame 12. Particularly, in recent gaming machines, the front frame 12 (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21) has a large projecting amount, so that the front frame 12 is connected to a game hall facility (for example, a calling lamp). Or the card unit, etc.), and the opening amount of the front frame 12 may be limited. In addition, the outer frame 11 allows the front frame 12 to be opened and closed using the left side as a rotation axis, but the outer frame 11 may be capable of opening and closing the front frame 12 using the right side as a rotation axis.

  The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 on the back side of the game board 30. The game control device 100 includes a game control board 510 that is housed in a board box with the connector connection portion facing. The effect control device 300 includes an effect control board 511 that is housed in a board box with the connector connecting part facing the front. Further, the front frame 12 includes various substrates 512, 513, and 514 facing the back side from the front frame 12. The various boards 512, 513, and 514 are a control board (for example, a payout control board), a relay board (for example, the relay board 70), and other boards (for example, an LED board or a sensor board). Further, the front frame 12 supports the game control board 510, the effect control board 511, and the various boards 512, 513, and 514 by making the component mounting surface visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

  The gaming machine 10 electrically connects the game control board 510, the effect control board 511, and the various boards 512, 513, and 514 by a harness. At this time, the harness functions as a signal line for transmitting and receiving signals between the boards or a power line for transmitting power between the boards.

  The front frame 12 includes various substrates and a harness (not shown) connected to the substrates facing the rear surface. The front frame 12 may have a substrate or a harness facing the back side through a protective cover (not shown).

  Next, the game control device 100 supported by the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of the game control device according to the second embodiment and an attachment base that supports the game control device with a front frame. FIG. 49 is a view illustrating an example of an AA cross section of the game control device according to the second embodiment.

  The front frame 12 includes a mounting base 521, and supports the game control device 100 via the mounting base 521. The game control device 100 accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and includes an engaging portion 522 on the upper long side and a locking portion 523 on the opposite lower side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the board box 520, and includes engaged portions 522 a and 522 b corresponding to the engaging portions 522, and a locked portion 523 a corresponding to the locking portions 523. Is provided.

  The board box 520 engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b first, and places the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation axis. By being locked to the locked portion 523a, it is fixed to the mounting base 521. When removing the board box 520 from the mounting base 521, the board box 520 requires an operation to release the locked state between the locking portion 523 and the locked portion 523a. Therefore, the locking portion 523 has a side surface as an operation portion for releasing the locked state of the board box 520 for the worker performing the maintenance work of the gaming machine 10.

  The board box 520 has an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as main structures, and holds the game control board 510 by sandwiching the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The upper member 5201 supports the game control board 510 with a board supporting portion 5203 (for example, a boss), and fixes the game control board 510 with screws 5204. In addition, the lower member 5202 supports the game control board 510 by a board support 5205 (for example, a rib). Thereby, the game control board 510 is supported from both outer surfaces of the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 with a predetermined gap.

  The upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 are caulked by a caulking part 524 (for example, a screw or the like). The caulking section 524 allows the user to switch between the caulked state and the caulked release state a predetermined number of times without leaving a trace. For example, the caulking portion 524 has a required number of screws before caulking, caulking one of them to make a caulking state, and destroying a previously prepared portion of the substrate box 520 to leave a trace (for example, The crimping state can be released while retaining the cutting marks of the resin. Further, the substrate box 520 includes a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal 525a is attached to the sealing portion 525, so that the presence or absence of opening of the substrate box 520 can be detected based on the state of the sealing seal 525a. For example, the sealing seal 525a is broken by opening the substrate box 520, and indicates that the substrate box 520 has been opened by the broken state. Note that the sealing seal 525a may include an RF (Radio Frequency) tag or the like, and determines whether or not the substrate box 520 has been opened by short-range wireless communication (for example, by detecting the destruction of the antenna due to communication failure). It may be one that enables detection.

  The game control board 510 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 510 is a two-layer board having a front surface as a component mounting surface and a back surface as a solder surface. The game control board 510 includes a required number of connectors 530 and components 540 on a component mounting surface. The component 540 is inside the board box 520 and is not exposed to the outside so that the component 540 cannot be replaced with an unauthorized component. On the other hand, the connector 530 faces the outside of the board box 520 from a window 5209 which is an opening provided in the board box 520 (upper member 5201), and is connectable with a predetermined harness. The game control board 510 arranges many of the connectors 530 on the upper side to prevent the harness from obstructing the observation of the component mounting surface. Further, although the game control board 510 has a connector arranged on the lower side, such a connector is limited to a connector (for example, an inspection connector or the like) to which a harness is not connected in an operating environment. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 achieves both efficiency of component arrangement and suppression of obstruction of observation of the component mounting surface.

  Next, mounting of a resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a game control board according to the second embodiment and directions of resistors mounted on the game control board.

  The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 50 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on a component mounting surface, and includes a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as components 540 on a component mounting surface in a required direction. The resistor 541 is a resistor provided in a direction along the left and right direction of the front frame 12. The resistor 542 is a resistor disposed in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction of the front frame 12, that is, in a direction along the vertical direction of the front frame 12.

  The resistors 541 and 542 are passive elements that indicate a rating by a color code, and have a required number of color bands. For example, the resistors 541 and 542 have four color bands, a first number indicated by the first color band 543, a second number indicated by the second color band 544, and a multiplier indicated by the third color band 545. The nominal resistance tolerance indicated by the fourth color band 546 is displayed. Therefore, the resistors 541 and 542 can easily confirm the first color band 543, and thus can easily confirm the resistors 541 and 542. The resistors 541 and 542 display the first color band 543 on the side where the color band interval is narrow, and display the fourth color band 546 on the side where the color band interval is wide.

  As shown in FIG. 50B, the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. The left side of the front frame 12 with respect to the main body frame 11 is an open side (open end side), and the right side is a pivot support side (rotating shaft side). Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12. In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 directed toward the pivot of the front frame 12.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the worker who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50C, the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the lower side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the lower side of the front frame 12. In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 542 facing the upper side of the front frame 12.

  Further, the game control board 510 includes a connector 530a used for game control and a connector 530b (test connector) used for a predetermined inspection and not used for game control. Since the connector 530a connects a predetermined connector to the harness, if the harness hangs on the component mounting surface of the game control board 510, the visibility of the mounted component may be hindered. That is, the game control board 510 improves the visibility of the first color band 543 as compared with the fourth color band 546 to improve the resistance 542 of the resistor 542 even when the harness may be applied to the component mounting surface of the game control board 510. The ease of confirmation is improved. Note that the connector 530b is not connected to the connector when the gaming machine 10 is in business operation at the amusement arcade, and thus does not hinder the observation of the component mounting surface.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the operator's ease of checking the resistance 542 (easier inspection work). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  Next, mounting of a resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described from another viewpoint with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a game control board according to the second embodiment and directions of resistors mounted on the game control board.

  The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 51 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on a component mounting surface, and includes a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as components 540 on a component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in the board box 520, and is supported by the front frame 12 with the engaging portion 522 of the board box 520 facing upward and the locking portion 523 facing down.

  As shown in FIG. 51B, the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the worker who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  As shown in FIG. 51C, the resistor 542 causes the first color band 543 to face the engaging portion 523 of the board box 520 and the fourth color band 546 to the engaging portion 522 of the board box 520. Turn.

  This allows the gaming machine 10 to provide a resistance to the worker based on the locking portion 523 serving as an operation unit when the board box 520 is removed from the front frame 12 when the front frame 12 is opened and maintenance and inspection work is performed. 542 can be confirmed. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the worker. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  Next, mounting of a resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described from a further viewpoint with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of a game control board according to the second embodiment and directions of resistors mounted on the game control board.

  The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 52 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and one connector 530b on a component mounting surface. The connector 530a is a connector used for game control, and the connector 530b is, for example, a connector for inspection, which is used for a predetermined inspection but is not used for game control. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, when the business operation in the amusement arcade is performed, although a required harness is connected to the connector 530a by a connector, the harness is usually not connected to the connector 530b. The connector 530b can be easily distinguished from the connector 530a in terms of whether or not the harness is connected to the connector. Note that the connector 530b may be distinguished by being given a different color from the connector 530a so that the connector 530b is red and the connector 530a is non-red in addition to the presence or absence of the harness connection. The connector 530b may be distinguished by a different shape from the connector 530a such that the connector 530b is a modular type and the connector 530a is a non-modular type, in addition to the presence or absence of the harness connection.

  The game control board 510 includes a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as components 540 on a component mounting surface in a required direction and a processor 532 on the component mounting surface. For example, the processor 532 is the gaming microcomputer 111. The processor 532 can be distinguished from other integrated circuits (for example, a driver IC) by attaching a sticker or the like indicating a model name. Note that the processor 532 can also be distinguished by having the maximum number of pins among components mounted on the game control board 510. Further, the processor 532 may be distinguished by being given a predetermined color so that the processor 532 is blue and other integrated circuits are non-blue (for example, black).

  Thereby, the game control board 510 allows the connector 530b to be specified as a specific connector to be mounted, and allows the processor 532 to be specified as a specific integrated circuit to be mounted.

  The game control board 510 arranges the connector 530b and the processor 532 with an offset d1 in the left and right direction and an offset d2 in the up and down direction. The offset d1 is defined such that a direction in which the connector 530b is located with respect to the processor 532 is a positive direction, and a direction in which the connector 530b is not located is a negative direction. The offset d2 is defined such that the direction in which the connector 530b is located with respect to the processor 532 is the positive direction, and the direction in which the connector 530b is not located is the negative direction.

As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the positive side of the offset d1 and the fourth color band 546 to the negative side of the offset d1.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clarifies the reference direction of the resistor 541, and improves the easiness of confirming the resistance 541 of the worker who performs the maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), the resistor 542 causes the first color band 543 to face the positive direction of the offset d2 and the fourth color band 546 to face the negative direction of the offset d2.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clarifies the reference direction of the resistor 542, and improves the easiness of confirming the resistance 542 of the worker who performs the maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  The positive direction of the offset d1 is the same as the front frame open side, and the negative direction of the offset d1 is the same as the front frame support side. The positive direction of the offset d2 is the same as the lower side of the front frame, and the negative direction of the offset d1 is the same as the upper side of the front frame. Similarly, the positive direction of the offset d2 is the same as that of the board box engaging portion, and the negative direction of the offset d2 is the same as that of the board box engaging portion.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can also improve the visibility of the resistors 541 and 542 while clarifying the reference directions of the resistors 541 and 542.
Next, mounting of a resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described from a further viewpoint with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating an example of a game control board according to the second embodiment and directions of resistors mounted on the game control board.

  The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 53 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and includes a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in the board box 520, and is sealed by the seal 525 at the sealing portion 525.

  The sealing seal 5251 displays required characters and designs. For example, the sealing seal 5251 displays the characters “opening prohibited”. Note that the sealing seal 5251 may display management information by displaying images such as alphanumeric characters, symbols, and two-dimensional codes. Further, the sealing seal 5251 may be one that clarifies the source or displays a design for preventing forgery. The sealing seal 5251 specifies the normal position of the sealing seal 5251 by required characters and designs. For example, the direction in which the right side of the sealing seal 5251 is viewed downward is defined as a normal position (based on the sealing portion).

  As shown in FIG. 53B, the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the worker who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (3), the resistor 542 causes the first color band 543 to face the sealing part reference left side (lower side in the figure) and the fourth color band 546 to the sealing part reference right side (upper figure). Turn to.
This allows the gaming machine 10 to allow the worker to check the resistance 542 based on the sealing portion 525 when performing the maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the worker. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510. It should be noted that the confirmation of the soundness of the sealing seal 525 and the confirmation of the game control board 510 are closely related to each other. Therefore, it is easy for an operator to use the sealing portion 525 as a reference.

  Next, mounting of a resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described from a further viewpoint with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram (part 5) illustrating an example of a game control board according to the second embodiment and directions of resistors mounted on the game control board.

  The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 54 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and includes a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as the component 540 on the component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in the board box 520, and is sealed by the seal 525 at the sealing portion 525. In addition, a management number sticker 5206 is attached to the surface of the substrate box 520. The management number label 5206 displays necessary information while making it easy to confirm the component mounting surface by using a transparent material as the base. For example, the management number label 5206 displays a main board management number as required information. For example, the management number sticker 5206 displays necessary information in black or white characters with a solid background of the characters as necessary. The management number sticker 5206 specifies the correct position of the management number sticker 5206 by displaying necessary information. For example, the management number sticker 5206 sets the direction in which the lower side in the figure is viewed downward as the normal position (reference number seal reference).

  The sealing seal 5251 displays required characters and designs. For example, the sealing seal 5251 displays the characters “opening prohibited”. The sealing seal 5251 specifies the normal position of the sealing seal 5251 by required characters and designs. For example, the direction in which the sealing seal 5251 is viewed downward on the right side in the drawing is the normal position (the sealing seal reference).

  Note that the direction of the management number seal reference is orthogonal to the direction of the sealing seal reference. The direction of the management number seal reference indicates the direction in which the resistor 541 is provided, and the direction of the sealing seal reference indicates the direction in which the resistor 542 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the management number seal reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side of the management number seal reference.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the worker confirm the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 by confirming the management number sticker 5206, and the confirmation easiness of the resistor 541 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the left side with respect to the sealing seal. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the left side of the sealing reference.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the worker grasp the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 by making the worker confirm the sealing seal 5251, thereby improving the easiness of confirming the resistor 542. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  It should be noted that the management number sticker 5206 and the sealing seal 5251 are closely related to grasping the type of the game control device by the management number seal 5206, checking the soundness of the sealing seal 5251, and checking the game control board 510. The reference is easy for the operator to understand.

  Next, the display of the component number on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a view illustrating an example of display of resistors mounted on the game control board according to the second embodiment and corresponding component numbers.

  The part number 547 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is displayed near the resistor 541 in the same direction as the resistor 541. The part number 547 displays, for example, the character “R15”. At this time, the first character “R” of the part number 547 is on the first color band 543 side of the resistor 541, and the last character “5” of the part number 547 is on the fourth color band 546 side of the resistor 541.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the first character of the part number 547 as a clue to facilitate finding the first color band 543 of the resistor 541. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 as a clue to facilitate finding the first character of the part number 547.

  The part number 548 shown in FIG. 55 (2) is displayed near the resistor 542 in the same direction as the resistor 542. The part number 548 displays, for example, the character “R16”. At this time, the first character “R” of the part number 548 is on the first color band 543 side of the resistor 542, and the last character “6” of the part number 548 is on the fourth color band 546 side of the resistor 542.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the first character of the part number 548 as a clue, and facilitates finding the first color band 543 of the resistor 542. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 as a clue to facilitate finding the first character of the part number 548.

  Up to here, the components 540 included in the game control board 510 have been described using the resistors 541 and 542, but the components provided on the component mounting surface in a required direction are not limited thereto. Components provided on the component mounting surface in a required direction will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example of a component provided on the component mounting surface according to the second embodiment.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 56A, the game control board 510 may include a chip (surface mount) type resistor 549. The resistor 549 is a passive element that indicates a rating by a character string, and has a required number of characters. The resistor 549 has three characters and displays a first numeral, a second numeral, and a multiplier in order from the left. For example, the resistor 549 indicates 1 kΩ by three characters “1”, “0”, and “2”. Therefore, the resistance 549 can easily confirm the first character, thereby increasing the ease of confirmation of the resistance 549.

  The part number 550 is displayed near the resistor 549 in the same direction as the character string displayed by the resistor 549. The part number 550 displays, for example, the character “R16”. At this time, the first character “R” of the part number 550 is on the “1” side indicating the first numeral of the resistor 549, and the last character “6” of the part number 550 is on the “2” side indicating the multiplier of the resistor 549. .

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the leading character of the part number 550 as a clue, and facilitates finding the first numeral of the resistor 549. Also, the gaming machine 10 uses the first number of the resistor 549 as a clue to facilitate finding the first character of the part number 550.

  The game control board 510 may include a capacitor 551, as shown in FIG. 56 (2). The capacitor 551 is a passive element indicating a rating by a color code, and has a required number of color bands. The capacitor 551 has three color bands, and displays a first number indicated by the first color band 552, a second number indicated by the second color band 553, and a multiplier indicated by the third color band 554. Therefore, the capacitor 551 can easily confirm the first color band 552, and thus can easily confirm the capacitor 551. The capacitor 551 displays the first color band 552 on the side where the color band interval is narrow, and displays the third color band 554 on the side where the color band interval is wide.

  The part number 555 is displayed near the capacitor 551 in a direction in which the color bands displayed by the capacitor 551 are arranged. The part number 555 displays, for example, the character “C10”. At this time, the first character “C” of the part number 555 is on the first color band 552 side of the capacitor 551, and the last character “0” of the part number 555 is on the third color band 554 side of the capacitor 551.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the first character of the part number 555 as a clue, and facilitates finding the first numeral of the capacitor 551. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the first number of the capacitor 551 as a clue to facilitate finding the first character of the part number 555.

  The game control board 510 may include a capacitor 556, as shown in FIG. 56 (3). The capacitor 556 is a passive element that indicates a rating by a character string, and has a required number of characters. The capacitor 556 has three characters and displays a first numeral, a second numeral, and a multiplier in order from the left. For example, capacitor 556 indicates 10,000 pF with three letters "1", "0", and "3". Therefore, the capacitor 556 can easily check the first character, thereby improving the checkability of the capacitor 556.

  The part number 557 is displayed near the capacitor 556 in a direction in which the character strings displayed by the capacitor 556 are arranged. The part number 557 displays, for example, the character “C11”. At this time, the leading character “C” of the part number 557 is on the “1” side indicating the first numeral of the capacitor 556, and the last character “1” of the part number 557 is on the “3” side indicating the multiplier of the capacitor 556. .

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the first character of the part number 557 as a clue to facilitate finding the first numeral of the capacitor 556. Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the first number of the capacitor 556 as a clue to facilitate finding the first character of the part number 557.

[Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment, the orientation of the components mounted on the board is aligned in a specific direction related to the two-dimensional code provided in each of the management number seal and the sealing seal. Mounting of a resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 according to the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game control board according to Modification Example 1 of the second embodiment and directions of resistors mounted on the game control board.

  The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 55 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on a component mounting surface, and includes a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as components 540 on a component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is housed in the board box 520 and is sealed by the seal 525 at the sealing portion 525. In addition, a management number sticker 5207 is attached to the surface of the substrate box 520. The management number label 5207 displays necessary information while making it easy to confirm the component mounting surface using a transparent material as the base. For example, management number sticker 5207 displays management code 5208 as required information. For example, management code 5208 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)). The management code 5208 specifies the normal position of the management code 5208 by a display mode in which an alignment pattern appearing in the pattern is displayed on the lower right side. For example, the management code 5208 sets the direction in which the lower side in the figure is viewed downward as the normal position (management code reference).

  The sealing seal 5252 displays a sealing code 5253 as required information. For example, the sealing code 5253 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)). The sealing code 5253 specifies the normal position of the sealing code 5253 in a display mode in which an alignment pattern appearing in the pattern is displayed on the lower right side. For example, the direction in which the sealing code 5253 is viewed downward on the right side in the drawing is defined as a normal position (sealing code reference).

  Note that the direction of the management code reference is orthogonal to the direction of the sealing code reference. The direction of the management code reference indicates the direction in which the resistor 541 is provided, and the direction of the sealing code reference indicates the direction in which the resistor 542 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the management code reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side of the management code reference.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the worker grasp the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 by confirming the management code 5208 (management number label 5207), thereby improving the easiness of confirming the resistor 541. I do. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the sealing code reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the left side of the sealing code reference.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the worker grasp the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 by making the worker confirm the sealing code 5253 (sealing seal 5252). improves. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  Note that the identification of the type of the game control device by the management code 5208, the soundness confirmation (or the validity of the sealing seal 5252) by the sealing code 5253, and the confirmation of the game control board 510 are closely related. Using the management code 5208 or the sealing code 5253 as a reference is easy for an operator to understand.

[Modification 2 of Second Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a gaming machine 10 according to a modification 2 of the second embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment is different from the board box 520 of the second embodiment in that the positions of the engaging portion and the locking portion are reversed.

  First, the game control device 100 supported by the front frame 12 of the second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game control device according to Modification 2 of the second embodiment and an example of an attachment base that supports the game control device with a front frame.

  The front frame 12 includes a mounting base 550, and supports the game control device 100 via the mounting base 550. The game control device 100 accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 551. The board box 551 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and includes a locking portion 552 on the long side on the upper side and an engaging portion 553 on the opposite side on the lower side. The mounting base 550 has a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the board box 551, includes engaged portions 553a and 553b corresponding to the engaging portions 553, and an engaged portion 552a corresponding to the engaging portions 552. Is provided.

  The board box 551 engages the engaging portion 553 and the engaged portions 553a and 553b first, and then mounts the engaging portion 553 on the mounting base 550 with the engaging portion 553 as a rotation axis. By being locked to the locked portion 552a, it is fixed to the mounting base 550. When mounting the board box 551 to the mounting base 550, the board box 551 requires an operation of first engaging the engaging portion 553 with the engaged portions 553a and 553b. Therefore, the engaging portion 553 has a side surface as a work starting point of the mounting operation of the board box 551 for the worker performing the maintenance operation of the gaming machine 10.

  The connector 530a faces the outside of the board box 551 from a window serving as an opening provided in the board box 551 (upper member), and is connectable to a predetermined harness by a connector. The game control board 510 suppresses the harness from obstructing the observation of the component mounting surface by disposing the connector 530a on the upper side. In the game control board 510, the connector 530a is arranged on the upper side, so that the harness impairs the visibility of the locking portion 552. Such a game control device 100 hinders the operability of a third party who attempts an unauthorized operation.

  Next, mounting of a resistor (resistance) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game control board according to Modification 2 of the second embodiment and directions of resistors mounted on the game control board.

  The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 59 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on a component mounting surface, and includes a required number of resistors 541 and 542 on a component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is accommodated in the board box 551, and is supported by the front frame 12 with the locking portion 552 of the board box 551 facing upward and the engaging portion 553 facing down.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 541 of the worker who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), the resistor 542 causes the first color band 543 to face the engaging portion 553 of the board box 551 and the fourth color band 546 to the locking portion 552 of the board box 551. Turn.

  This allows the gaming machine 10 to provide resistance to the worker with reference to the engagement portion 553 serving as a work starting point when the board box 551 is mounted on the front frame 12 when the front frame 12 is opened and maintenance and inspection work is performed. 542 can be confirmed. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the worker. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

[Modification 3 of Second Embodiment]
Next, a description is given of a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the second embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment is different from the gaming control board 510 of the second embodiment in that a reset SW is provided on the board. The mounting of a resistor (resistance) on the game control board according to the third modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game control board according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment and directions of resistors mounted on the game control board.

  The game control board 555 shown in FIG. 60 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on a component mounting surface and a required number of resistors 541 and 542 on a component mounting surface in a required direction. Further, the game control board 555 includes a reset SW 556 at one corner of the rectangular board. For example, the game control board 555 includes a reset SW 556 at the lower left corner of the board. The lower left corner of the substrate is a position on the open end side of the front frame 12 where the operability of the reset SW 556 is excellent, and a position where the harness connected to the connector 530a does not hinder the operability of the reset SW 556.

  The resistor 541 is a resistor provided in a direction along the left and right direction of the front frame 12. The resistor 542 is a resistor disposed in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction of the front frame 12, that is, in a direction along the vertical direction of the front frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. That is, the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 in the direction in which the reset SW 556 is located on the game control board 555. Therefore, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the direction in which the reset SW 556 is located. In other words, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing the direction without the reset SW 556.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 provides the reset SW 556 as a suitable mark to the worker who performs the maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12, and improves the ease of checking the resistance 541. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 555.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60C, the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the lower side of the front frame 12. That is, the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 in the direction where the reset SW 556 is located on the game control board 555. Therefore, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the direction in which the reset SW 556 is located. In other words, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 542 so that the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 542 faces the direction without the reset SW 556.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 provides the reset SW 556 as a suitable mark to the worker who performs the maintenance and inspection work by opening the front frame 12, and improves the ease of confirming the resistance 542. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 555.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of checking the resistance 542 of the worker. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 555.

  In the third modification of the second embodiment, the reset SW 556 has been described as an example of a reference component for grasping the directions of the resistors 541 and 542. However, the reset SW 556 may be provided at one corner of a rectangular substrate. Alternatively, other components may be used as reference components.

  Further, the third modification of the second embodiment has been described by exemplifying the lower left corner of the substrate as one corner of the rectangular substrate. However, one corner of the rectangular substrate is described as the upper left, upper right, lower right, or the like. May be used.

  Although the game control board 510 has been described as an example in the second embodiment, the effect control board 511, various other control boards (for example, a payout control board), a relay board (for example, the relay board 70), The present invention is also applicable to other substrates (for example, an LED substrate or a sensor substrate).

  In the second embodiment, the game control board 510 is exemplified, and instead of the resistors 541 and 542, a resistor 549 and capacitors 551 and 556 may be mounted. The same can be applied to the modified example. Further, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified example) may have a structure in which a resistor 549 and capacitors 551 and 556 are mounted in addition to the resistors 541 and 542. May be performed. In the gaming machine 10, even if different components are mixed, it is possible to improve the easiness of checking the components according to the above-described arrangement rule.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a main body frame (outer frame 11), a front frame (front frame 12) that can be opened and closed using one of the left and right sides of the main body frame as a rotation axis, And a substrate supported by the frame (for example, a game control substrate 510). When mounting a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) indicating a rating by a color code in the horizontal direction on the substrate, the first color band of the color code is set to the open end side of the front frame (see FIG. 50).

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a housing case (for example, a board box 551) for housing the board with the component mounting surface visible. The housing case includes an engaging portion that engages with a front frame (for example, engaged portions 553a and 553b provided on a mounting base 550 of the front frame 12) on one side (for example, below the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. (For example, the engaging portion 553) and a member for locking to a front frame (for example, a locked portion 552a of the mounting base 550 of the front frame 12) on the other side along the left-right direction with the engaging portion as a rotation axis. And a stop portion (for example, a locking portion 552). When a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) is mounted in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction), the first color band of the color code is set to the engaging portion side (see FIGS. 58 and 59). .

  (3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a housing case (for example, a board box 520) for housing the board with the component mounting surface visible. The housing case has an engaging portion (for example, an engaging portion (for example, engaging portion 522a, 522b) provided on the mounting base 521 of the front frame 12) on one side (upper side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. An engaging portion 522) and a locking portion (for example, a locked portion 523a provided on the mounting base 521 of the front frame 12) on the other side along the left-right direction with the engaging portion as a rotation axis. For example, a locking portion 523). When mounting the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction), the substrate sets the first color band of the color code to the locking portion side (see FIG. 51).

  (4) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes an accommodating case (for example, a board box 520) for accommodating the board with the component mounting surface visible. The housing case houses a board with a plurality of connectors (for example, connector 530a) on the board facing one side (upper side of front frame 12) along the left-right direction. When mounting the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction), the substrate is configured to change the first color band of the color code to the other side (the lower side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. ) (See FIG. 50).

  (5) When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in a direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction (vertical direction), the substrate of (1) sets the first color band of the color code to the front frame (front frame 12). ) (See FIG. 50).

  (6) The gaming machine 10 of (5) includes an accommodating case (for example, a board box 520) for accommodating the board with the component mounting surface visible. The housing case houses the board with a plurality of connectors (for example, connector 530a) on the board facing the upper side of the front frame (see FIG. 48).

  (7) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, the game control board 510) and a housing case (for example, a board box 520) for housing the board so that the component mounting surface is visible. The housing case includes a base (eg, lower member 5202) that supports the substrate, a cover (eg, upper member 5201) that covers the substrate from the component mounting surface and engages with the base, and a base and cover. A sealing portion (for example, a sealing portion 525) that seals the engagement relationship with the body portion. The substrate has a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) indicating the rating indicated by a color code and a direction parallel to one side (for example, the right side of the game control board 510 shown in FIG. 53) on the sealing portion side (for example, a front frame). 12, the first color band of the color code is set to the left side (for example, the sealing part reference left side) with the sealing part facing downward (see FIGS. 48 and 53).

  (8) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, a game control board 510), and a housing case (for example, a board box 520) for housing the board so that the component mounting surface is visible. The housing case includes a first case portion (for example, an upper member 5201) that covers the component mounting surface of the board, a second case portion (for example, a lower member 5202) that engages with the first case portion, and a first case portion. And a sealing portion (for example, a sealing portion 525) for sealing an engagement relationship between the second case portion and the second case portion. The substrate has a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) indicating the rating indicated by a color code and a direction parallel to one side (for example, the right side of the game control board 510 shown in FIG. 53) on the sealing portion side (for example, a front frame). 12, the first color band of the color code is set to the left side (for example, the sealing part reference left side) with the sealing part facing downward (see FIGS. 48 and 53).

  (9) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, a game control board 510) and a housing case (for example, a board box 520) for housing the board so that the component mounting surface can be viewed. The housing case includes a base portion (for example, a lower member 5202) that supports the board, a cover portion (for example, an upper member 5201) that covers the board from the component mounting surface and engages with the base portion, and one direction ( For example, the control number slip (for example, control number sticker 5206) attached along the front frame 12 (in the left-right direction) and the engagement relationship between the base portion and the cover portion are set in a direction orthogonal to one direction. And a sealing portion (for example, a sealing portion 525) for sealing with a sealing slip (for example, a sealing seal 5251) attached in a direction (for example, the vertical direction of the front frame 12). When a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) indicating a rating by a color code is mounted in one direction, the first color band of the color code is placed on the left side of the substrate (for example, the control number). When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in a direction orthogonal to one direction, the first color band of the color code is left (for example, the (Refer to FIG. 54).

(10) The control number slip and the seal slip of (9) indicate the correct position by the character strings (for example, main board control number, characters “unopening prohibited”, etc.) to be displayed (see FIG. 54).
(11) The control number slip and the seal slip of (9) indicate the correct position by image display (for example, a two-dimensional code, a design, etc.) (see FIG. 57).

(12) The image display in (11) is a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 57).
(13) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular board (game control board 510) including a processor (for example, the processor 532) and an inspection terminal (for example, the connector 530b) used for inspection and not used for game control. Prepare. On the board, a processor and an inspection terminal are mounted with offsets (offsets d1 and d2) in the vertical and horizontal directions, respectively, and passive elements (for example, resistors 541 and 542) indicating ratings by color codes are mounted in the vertical and horizontal directions. When a plurality of passive elements (for example, a resistor 542) mounted in the vertical direction and a passive element (for example, the resistor 541) mounted in the horizontal direction are mounted on the processor, the direction in which the inspection terminal is located with respect to the processor is indicated by a color code. The direction in which the first color band is located (see FIG. 52).

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the orientation of components mounted between the integrated circuit and the connector on the board is aligned in a specific direction in the positional relationship between the integrated circuit and the connector. First, the board arrangement environment in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement relationship of an integrated circuit, a connector, and a resistor on a game control board according to the third embodiment, and an example of a direction of a resistor mounted on the game control board. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the gaming machine 10 mounts the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563 on the board mounting surface of the game control board 510. The integrated circuit 560 is a rectangular IC package whose one side is a longitudinal direction when viewed from the front. For example, a driver IC for input signals (more specifically, the integrated circuit 560 is an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 ). Note that the integrated circuit 560 is an example of an integrated circuit mounted on the game control board 510, and may be a driver IC for an output signal, a required control circuit, a buffer circuit, a port expander, or the like.

  The connectors 561, 562, and 563 are connectors for inputting and outputting signals input and output by the integrated circuit 560 to the outside. The connectors 561, 562, and 563 and the integrated circuit 560 face each other with the component arrangement region 566 interposed therebetween.

  In the component placement area 566, a linear resistor 541 (linear component: for example, component number R22, R21) is disposed on the integrated circuit 560 side from the line TL, and the linear resistor 542 is on the connector 561, 562, 563 side from the line TL. (Linear parts: for example, part numbers R15, R3, R2) are arranged. The resistor 541 is arranged in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the integrated circuit 560 (horizontal direction in the figure), and the resistor 542 is arranged in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the integrated circuit 560 (vertical direction in the figure). In other words, the resistor 542 is disposed in a direction (vertical direction in the drawing) connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563, and the resistor 541 is orthogonal to a direction connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563. (In the horizontal direction in the figure).

  The game control board 510 is a multi-layer board (for example, a two-layer board), and when connecting the connectors 561, 562, 563 and the integrated circuit 560 via the resistor 542, the first layer (for example, component mounting). When the connectors 561, 562, 563 and the integrated circuit 560 are connected via the resistor 541, the wiring pattern is passed through the second layer (for example, the solder surface).

  Thereby, the game control board 510 facilitates the routing of the wiring pattern passing through the resistor 541 and the wiring pattern passing through the resistor 542. Also, the game control board 510 divides the component arrangement area 566 and aligns the directions of the resistors 541 and 542, thereby facilitating component confirmation. Further, the game control board 510 divides the component arrangement area 566 to align the directions of the resistors 541 and 542, thereby facilitating securing a display area for the component number.

  Although the game control board 510 exemplifies the resistors 541 and 542 as an example of the mounted components, other components having a mounting direction may be replaced with the resistors 541 and 542 or in addition to the resistors 541 and 542 in the component placement area 566. It may be implemented in.

  Further, the game control board 510 may limit the orientation of components in the component arrangement region between all integrated circuits and all connectors, or may limit the orientation of only a part. . For example, the connectors 561 and 562 are connectors that are connected to start-up switches (start-up 1 switch 36a and start-up 2 switch 37a), and their presence is clearly indicated by fluorescent colors. The game control board 510 may set a component placement area between the connectors 561 and 562 that need to be alerted as such an unauthorized monitoring target and the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side (open side of the front frame 12). In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing the right side (the pivotal support side of the front frame 12).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 downward. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing downward (below the front frame 12). In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 542 facing upward (upward of the front frame 12).

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the easiness of checking the resistances 541 and 542 of the worker performing the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

Next, an example of setting the line TL will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the line TL according to the third embodiment.
The line TL shown in FIG. 62A is set so as to pass through the lower end of the through hole 564 into which the lead wire below the resistor 542 (on the side of the integrated circuit 560) is inserted. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistor 542 side of the line TL. Note that the line TL is not limited to the lower end of the through hole 564, and may be set between the upper end and the lower end of the through hole 564.

  The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (2) is set so as to pass through the lower end (the integrated circuit 560 side) of the main body (excluding the lead wire) of the resistor 542. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistor 542 side of the line TL. The line TL may be set between the lower end of the main body of the resistor 542 and the upper end of the through hole 564.

  The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (3) is set below the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 (on the side of the integrated circuit 560) and at a position overlapping the main body of the resistor 542. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistor 542 side of the line TL.

  The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (4) is set at a position separated by a distance d from the lower end (BL) of the through hole 564 into which the lead wire below the resistor 542 (on the integrated circuit 560) is inserted. . At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 on the resistor 542 side of the line TL.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (5), the game control board 510 may display the part number 548 on the resistor 542 side of the line TL so as to be in contact with the line TL. Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (6), the game control board 510 may display the part number 548 across the line TL.

  The line TL is a virtual line that can be recognized by components mounted on the game control board 510, through holes, patterns, and silk printing (part number display, etc.). It may be a solid line specified by a solid line, a broken line, or the like) or a solid line specified by printing, a seal, or the like on the board box 520.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment will be described. In a gaming machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment, a component arrangement region and a non-component arrangement region are arranged between an integrated circuit and a connector on a substrate. The component placement area and the non-component placement area will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of a component arrangement area and a non-component arrangement area located between an integrated circuit and a connector on a game control board according to a modification of the third embodiment. Drawing 64 is a figure showing an example of AA section of a game control device of a modification of a 3rd embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 includes the game control device 100 that accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 520, and mounts the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563 on the board mounting surface of the game control board 510.

  The game control board 510 sets a component placement area 566 and a non-component placement area 565 side by side between the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563. The component placement area 566 is located on the integrated circuit 560 side, and the non-component placement area 565 is located on the connector 561, 562, 563 side. In the component placement area 566, the resistor 542 is placed, and in the non-component placement area 565, a component number 548 corresponding to the resistor 542 is displayed.

  The integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542, and the resistor 542 and the connector 561 are electrically connected via a pattern 572 provided on a solder surface of the substrate 570. That is, the game control board 510 does not have a pattern for electrically connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542 and the resistor 542 and the connector 561 on the component mounting surface of the board 570.

  The integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542 are housed in the substrate box 520 and protected from the outside. On the other hand, the connector 561 faces the outside through the opening 567 provided in the board box 520, and enables a required harness to be connected to the connector.

  The board box 520 has a predetermined gap on the various components to accommodate various components (eg, the integrated circuit 560, the resistor 542, etc.). On the other hand, the board box 520 is close to the game control board 510 near the opening 567. Therefore, the board box 520 has an upright wall 568 between an area for housing various components (component arrangement area 566) and the opening 567. The upright wall 568 is within the non-component placement area 565.

  Since the non-component placement area 565 includes the upright wall 568, the game control board 510 may have insufficient visibility of the component number display near the upright wall 568 in some cases. Therefore, the game control board 510 displays the part numbers corresponding to the components (for example, the integrated circuit 560, the resistor 542, and the like) in the range of the component placement area 566 in the range of the area 5651, and various connectors (for example, the connector 561 and the like). ) Is displayed in the area 5653, and the display of the part numbers in the area 5652 is restricted.

  Here, a part number display according to a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. 65 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a part number display according to a modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a part number display according to a modification of the third embodiment.

  In the component number display shown in FIG. 65A, the component number 573 corresponding to the resistor 542 is displayed in the same direction as the resistor 542 in the area 5651 of the non-component arrangement area 565, and the connector 561 is displayed in the area 5653. Are displayed in the same direction as the connector 561 (the direction orthogonal to the resistor 542), and the display of the part number in the area 5652 is not displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the easiness of checking the parts and the part numbers of the worker who performs the maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily detect an illegal act on the game control board 510.

  In the part number display shown in FIG. 65 (2), in the non-part arrangement area 565, the part number 575 is displayed in the area 5651, and the part number 576 is displayed across the area 5651 and the area 5652. However, the part number 576 is a numeral part having a large discriminating power in relation to the adjacent part number (the numeral “15” is displayed in the area 5651, and a character part having a small discriminating power in the relation to the adjacent part number (character “R”) is displayed in the area 5652. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure a certain discriminating power of the part number 576 while sacrificing a part of the visibility of the part number 576. The gaming machine 10 can improve the degree of freedom of the display position of another part number (for example, the part number 575) by sacrificing a part of the visibility of the part number 576. 10 improves the ease of checking the parts and part numbers of the worker who performs the maintenance and inspection work, so that the gaming machine 10 facilitates the detection of fraudulent acts on the game control board 510. Door can be.

  FIG. 66 (1) is an enlarged view of a part (non-component arrangement area 565) of an AA section of the game control device shown in FIG. The substrate box 520 may be deformed by receiving an external force from the outside. At that time, the upright wall corner 580 of the board box 520 may come into contact with the game control board 510.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), the game control board 510 arranges the pattern 582 on the solder surface avoiding the component mounting surface in the region 581 immediately below the upright wall corner where the upright wall corner 580 can come into contact. Thereby, the game control board 510 prevents the game control board 510 from malfunctioning due to receiving an external force from the outside of the board box 520 and malfunctioning.

  In addition, when the pattern 583 cannot be arranged on the solder surface avoiding the component mounting surface in the area 581 immediately below the rising wall corner portion, that is, when the pattern 583 is arranged on the component mounting surface, The part number 584 is displayed on the pattern 583 in the area 581 immediately below the section. Since the part number 584 has a certain thickness by silk printing or the like, the pattern 583 can be protected.

Thereby, the game control board 510 prevents the game control board 510 from malfunctioning due to receiving an external force from the outside of the board box 520 and causing malfunction.
Note that the third embodiment has been described by exemplifying the game control board 510, but the effect control board 511, other various control boards (for example, a payout control board), a relay board (for example, the relay board 70), The present invention is also applicable to other substrates (for example, an LED substrate or a sensor substrate).

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a control board (for example, a game machine) including an integrated circuit (for example, an integrated circuit 560) and connectors (for example, connectors 561, 562, and 563) to which signals input and output by the integrated circuit can be connected. Control board 510). The control board is provided in a connector-side region located on the connector side among a plurality of passive elements (for example, resistors 541 and 542) mounted in a region between the integrated circuit and the connector (for example, in the component placement region 566). The direction of the passive element to be mounted is the first direction connecting the integrated circuit and the connector (for example, the direction connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563), and the passive element is mounted in the integrated circuit side region located on the integrated circuit side. The direction of the passive element is set to a second direction orthogonal to the first direction (for example, a direction orthogonal to the direction connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563).

  (2) The connector side region of (1) is a region located between the integrated circuit and the connector and located closer to the connector than a predetermined line, and the integrated circuit side region is located closer to the integrated circuit than the predetermined line. Is the area to be used.

(3) The predetermined line in (2) is a line specified on the control board (for example, an actual line by silk printing or the like).
(4) The predetermined line in (2) is a line that is not specified on the control board (for example, a virtual line that can be recognized from a mounted component or the like).

  (5) The gaming machine 10 is a control board (for example, a game) including an integrated circuit (for example, an integrated circuit 560) and connectors (for example, connectors 561, 562, and 563) to which signals input and output by the integrated circuit can be connected. Control board 510). The control board mounts a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) on an integrated circuit side region (for example, a component arrangement region 566) located on the integrated circuit side in a region between the integrated circuit and the connector, and mounts the passive element on the connector side. The passive element information (for example, the part number 548) regarding the passive element is displayed in the located connector side area (for example, the non-part arrangement area 565).

[Calculation and display of base]
Here, the calculation and display of the base as the gaming performance performed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. Here, the base is the payout rate in the normal gaming state. Here, the normal game state is a state that is neither a time reduction state nor a big hit game state (big hit state). More generally, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variable display game is a normal probability state (low probability). State). The payout rate is the number of payout balls per 100 out balls. Therefore, assuming that the number of out balls in the normal game state is Nout and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Nsafe, the base B is calculated by the formula B = (Nsafe ÷ Nout) × 100. The number of out-balls is the number of balls that have been fired into the game area and entered the out-mouth or winning opening (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-described out-ball detection switch signal). It may be called out. The number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning, and may be referred to as the number of payouts, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the game control device 100 of the gaming machine 10 is provided with the status display device 135. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a status display device 135 as a display means of the base and a storage area for the base. FIG. 67 (1) shows a display unit of the status display device 135, and FIG. Is shown. FIG. 68 shows a display example of the status display device 135.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (1), the status display device 135 includes four-digit seven-segment LEDs arranged side by side, and a dot point (small circular light emission) is provided at the lower right of each of the seven-segment LEDs. Part) is provided. Regarding the display of the base, of the four-digit seven-segment LED, the two digits on the left side are identification segments for displaying the base measurement time (whether or not the measurement is in progress and the order of measurement), and the two digits on the right side Is a ratio segment displaying the base value. As shown in FIG. 68, “B” is actually displayed in the form of a small letter “b” on the 7-segment LED of the status display device 135.

  The game control device 100 (specifically, the CPU 111A serving as the control unit) sets a storage area for the base as shown in FIG. 67 (2) in the RWM such as the RAM 111C, and calculates the base and displays the base. use. That is, the game control device 100 sets “the number of out-balls” that stores the accumulated value of the number of out-balls and “the number of payout balls” that stores the accumulated value of the number of paid-out balls as the base calculation storage area. Further, “base (BL)”, “base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, and “base (B3)” are set as base storage areas for storing the calculated values of the base.

  Here, “base (BL)” is an area for storing the base being measured, “base (B1)” is an area for storing the base measured one time before, and “base (B2)” is 2 This is an area for storing the base measured three times before, and “base (B3)” is an area for storing the base measured three times before. That is, this is an area for storing the oldest measured value (calculated value) of the base in the storage area in which “base (B3)” is set.

  The storage values of the base calculation storage area and the base storage area described above are backed up and stored when the power is turned off, and when the RAM is cleared (when the power is turned on by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112) except for an RWM abnormality. It is desirable to have a configuration in which the data is held without being cleared to zero even at (time).

  The game control device 100 uses the state display device 135 to display the setting contents of the probability setting (any one of the five stages) in the above-described setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Display the base. In the above-described first embodiment, the mode in which the setting content of the probability setting is displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 has been described. However, the probability set value display device 136 may be deleted, and the state display device 135 may also function as a probability set value display device. In this case, the display of the setting contents is performed by the state display device 135. In the mode, the base is displayed by the status display device 135 in other cases.

  The game control device 100 performs the calculation and display of the base as follows as an example. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 first flashes all segments (including dot points) of the four-digit seven-segment LED of the status display device 135 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the BL display state as shown in FIG. 68 (1), the B1 display state as shown in FIG. 68 (2), the B2 display state as shown in FIG. 68 (3), and FIG. The operation of maintaining the B3 display state as shown in 4) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is repeatedly executed. That is, in a steady state after power-on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, the B3 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, The BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and the four states are sequentially switched and repeated, such as.

  Here, in the BL display state, the game control device 100 displays “bL” (BL) indicating that the base measurement time is being measured (this time) on the identification segment, and displays the base storage area “base” on the ratio segment. (BL) "(or"--"). Further, in the B1 display state, the game control device 100 displays “b1” (B1) indicating that the base measurement time is one time before in the identification segment, and stores the base storage area “base (B1)” in the ratio segment. "(Or"--"). Further, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 displays “b2” (B2) indicating that the base measurement time is two times before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area “base (B2)” in the ratio segment. "(Or"--"). Also, in the B3 display state, the game control device 100 displays “b3” (B3) indicating that the base measurement time is three times before in the identification segment, and stores the base storage area “base (B3)” in the ratio segment. "(Or"--").

  On the other hand, for the calculation of the base, after starting, the game control device 100 sets the base calculation storage area in the normal game state, for example, every time an out ball is detected (ie, every time an out ball detection switch signal is output). The stored value of the "number of out-balls" is increased by a value corresponding to the number of detected out-balls, and a prize ball is paid out every time there is a prize in the winning port of the game ball in the normal gaming state (or a prize ball based on the prize) (E.g., every time) the stored value of the “number of balls to be paid out” in the storage area for base calculation corresponds to the number of balls to be paid out (or the number of awarded balls actually paid out detected based on a signal from the payout control device 200). Increase by Further, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-described formula, for example, every time the stored value of the “number of out balls” or the “number of paid out balls” in the base calculation storage area changes, and Overwrite “base (BL)” in the base storage area as the latest value.

  Note that when the stored value of the “number of out balls” in the base calculation storage area reaches a predetermined measurement number (for example, 60000 pieces), the game control device 100 determines that one measurement is completed, and performs the following measurement The processing at the end is performed. In the processing at the end of the measurement, the value of the base storage area “base (B2)” at that time is overwritten on the base storage area “base (B3)”, and the base storage area “base (B1)” at that time is overwritten. Is overwritten on the base storage area “base (B2)”, the value of the base storage area “base (BL)” at that time is overwritten on the base storage area “base (B1)”, The stored values of “number of out balls” and “number of payout balls” in the base calculation storage area are cleared and reset to zero. Thus, the base value up to three times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored and held.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets the storage value of the base calculation storage area “out ball number” to a predetermined calculation start number (for example, the storage value of the base calculation storage area “out ball number” is zero) when the power is first turned on (for example, In a period A of less than 300 (predetermined number of less than 300), in each display state, characters indicating the base measurement time such as “bL”, “b1”... ), "--" (A state in which only the central horizontally long segment emits light) is displayed to notify that the measurement is not performed.

  Next, when the storage value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 changes the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialize (clear to zero) and start the first measurement.

  In the period B from the start of the first measurement to the time when the stored value of the base calculation storage area “number of out-balls” reaches the measured number (for example, 60,000), the game control device 100 determines the identification segment in the BL display state. "BL" is displayed blinking or lit, and the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" is displayed in the ratio segment. In the period B, in other display states (B1 to B3 display states), characters indicating the base measurement time such as “b1” are blinkingly displayed in the identification segment, and “−−” is displayed in the ratio segment, Notify that it is not measured.

  Note that the display of “bL” in the identification segment in the BL display state flashes when the storage value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” is less than the measured number, and the base calculation storage area “out”. When the stored value of “the number of balls” reaches the measured number, the display is turned on. The blinking period of the blinking display in the identification segment or the ratio segment is, for example, 0.6 seconds, and for example, 0.3 seconds on and 0.3 seconds off. When the stored value of the “number of out balls” reaches the measured number (for example, 60000) and the period B ends, the above-described processing at the end of the measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 calls a period C for performing the second measurement, a period D for performing the third measurement, a period E for performing the fourth measurement, in the same manner as the period B for performing the first measurement. Measurement is performed continuously. Then, after the end of the third measurement, since the calculated values of the past three bases are stored, in all of the display states B1 to B3, the base measurement time such as “b1” in the identification segment is set. The indicated characters are illuminated, and the value of the corresponding base storage area (any one of “base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, and “base (B3)”) is displayed in the ratio segment.

  68 (1) to 68 (4) show an example of a specific display in each display state in the period D after the second measurement is completed. In this case, since there is no measurement result three times before, in FIG. 68 (4) which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is "--" (display indicating the unmeasured state).

  Further, in FIG. 68 (1) which is a specific example of the BL display state, the display of the ratio segment is “58”, which indicates that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58. Further, in FIG. 68 (2), which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “67”, and the base value with respect to the prescribed measurement number measured immediately before is 67. It is shown that. Further, in FIG. 68 (3), which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “49”, and the base value with respect to the specified measurement number measured two times before is 49. It is shown that. When the value of the base is 100 or more, the ratio segment is displayed as “9 9.” (a number 99 is displayed in the ratio segment and the dot point of the last digit is lit), so that the ratio segment is displayed. Notify that

  The value of the base is generally in the normal range, for example, in the range of about 25 to 35, and is abnormal even if it is smaller than this range or larger than this range. This abnormality is called base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 68 described above shows, as an example, a state where the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 may, for example, measure the past three measured values of the base stored in the base storage area (“base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, “base (B3)”). If the display values of the ratio segments in the B3 display state are all out of the normal range and are abnormal, it is determined that a base abnormality has occurred, and a signal indicating that the base abnormality has occurred is sent to an external, for example, a game hall internal management device. (Hall computer).

  The signal (information) indicating the base abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command, for example, and the base abnormality is notified to the display area of the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 300 receiving the signal. An image (for example, an error notification image) may be displayed. In addition, since this base abnormality may occur when an illegal operation is performed, it is desirable to set the above-described strong error.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the measured value of the base is stored and displayed up to three times in the past, but the number of base storage areas is increased and stored and displayed up to four or more times in the past. The configuration may be as follows. In addition, although the base calculation storage area is set only for those being measured, storage areas for storing the number of out-balls and the number of payout-balls based on which past measurement values are calculated may be provided. Good.

[Fourth embodiment]
The game control device according to the fourth embodiment includes a game control board that can be easily checked by visual inspection. The game control board will be described as an example of a board that can be easily confirmed by visual inspection, but it can be applied to other boards such as an effect control board, a payout control board, a power supply board, a relay board, a sensor board, a lamp board, and the like. It is. First, a game control device according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a view illustrating an example of the game control device of the fourth embodiment.

  The game control device 100a is supported by the front frame 12 via the mounting base 521, similarly to the game control device 100 (see FIG. 48). The game control device 100a includes a board box 520 similar to the game control device 100 of the second embodiment, and accommodates a game control board 600 different from the game control device 100 of the second embodiment in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and includes an engaging portion 522 on the upper long side and a locking portion 523 on the opposite lower side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the board box 520, and includes engaged portions 522 a and 522 b corresponding to the engaging portions 522, and a locked portion 523 a corresponding to the locking portions 523. Is provided.

  The board box 520 engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b first, and places the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation axis. By being locked to the locked portion 523a, it is fixed to the mounting base 521. The board box 520 has an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as main structures, and holds the game control board 600 between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 (see FIG. 49).

  The caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw) caulks the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The caulking section 524 allows the user to switch between the caulked state and the caulked release state a predetermined number of times without leaving a trace. Further, the substrate box 520 includes a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal 525a is attached to the sealing portion 525, so that the presence or absence of opening of the substrate box 520 can be detected based on the state of the sealing seal 525a.

  In the board box 520, an information display seal 603 is attached to the upper member 5201. The information display sticker 603 displays required information such as a model name, a manufacturer name, a board management number, and a board box opening history. Note that the information display seal 603 may make it difficult to observe the game control board 600 immediately below when viewed from the front, but the game control is performed by printing and displaying information on a transparent base material to change the observation angle. A blind spot is not generated in the observation of the substrate 600. Note that ensuring the visibility of the information display seal 603 also depends on not increasing the area of the information display seal 603 unnecessarily. In addition, ensuring the visibility of the information display seal 603 also depends on ensuring the gap between the information display seal 603 and the game control board 600.

  The game control board 600 is a rectangular (eg, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 600 is a two-layer board in which conductor patterns are formed on the front and back surfaces, the front surface is a component mounting surface, and the back surface is a solder surface. The game control board 600 has screw holes 602 at each of the four corners, and is screwed into the lower member 5202 through the screw holes 602.

  The game control board 600 includes an information display area on at least one of the component mounting surface and the solder surface. For example, the game control board 600 includes an information display area 601 on the component mounting surface. The information display area 601 is an area for displaying required information on the game control board 600 such as a model name, a maker name, and a board management number.

  The information display area 601 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the information display seal 603 when viewed from the front. According to another viewpoint, the information display seal 603 is provided at a position that does not overlap the information display area 601 when viewed from the front. That is, the game control device 100a arranges the information display area 601 and the information display seal 603 at positions where they do not overlap in a front view. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 secures the visibility of the information display area 601 in a state where the game control device 100a is supported on the front frame 12. Since the information display area 601 displays information useful for confirming the game control board 600, the gaming machine 10 facilitates confirmation of the information display area 601 so that the game control board 600 or the game control device is displayed. Confirmation of 100a is facilitated.

  Next, the front and back surfaces of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a view illustrating an example of the front surface and the back surface of the game control board according to the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 600 includes necessary connectors and components on a component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 600 includes the connectors 530a and 530b, the resistors 541 and 542, the processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

  FIG. 70A shows the surface of the game control board 600, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 600 has an information display area 601 (shown by hatching), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 604 (shown by vertical hatching) on the surface.

  The information display area 601 displays control board information regarding the game control board 600. The information display area 601 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed separately from the GND pattern 604, based on a solid portion where no conductor pattern is formed. The information display area 601 has a rectangular shape, and one side thereof is provided in contact with one side of the game control board 600. Thereby, the game control board 600 prevents the GND pattern 604 from looping around the outer periphery of the information display area 601, and prevents the arrangement of the information display area 601 from becoming a noise source. Note that the game control board 600 does not need to provide the information display area 601 in contact with one side of the game control board 600 as long as noise due to the arrangement of the information display area 601 can be overlooked. That is, the game control board 600 may have the information display area 601 surrounded by the GND pattern 604. The information display area 601 may have a shape that is not limited to a rectangle, and may have a rounded corner, for example.

  The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602, and is located near the information display area 601. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower left corner when observing the surface of the game control board 600 with the information display area 601 on the lower side. The screw hole 602a is provided at a solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 604. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular, and two sides of the lower left corner thereof are provided in contact with two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 600. Thus, the game control board 600 prevents the GND pattern 604 from looping around the periphery of the solid hole around the screw hole 602a, and prevents the arrangement of the solid hole around the screw hole 602a from becoming a noise source. The game control board 600 is in contact with two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 600 if the noise caused by the arrangement of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a can be overlooked. There is no need to provide a punch. That is, the game control board 600 may be a board in which a solid portion around the screw hole 602a is surrounded by the GND pattern 604. Further, the solid portion around the screw hole 602a may be not limited to a rectangular shape, and may have a rounded corner, for example.

  The GND pattern 604 is GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 604 is provided on the periphery of the information display area 601. As a result, the GND pattern 604 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 601 formed in the solid portion, and clarifying the location of the information display area 601 on the game control board 600. The GND pattern 604 is provided on the periphery of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the solid area around the information display area 601 and the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 604 interposed therebetween, the screw hole 602a also has a role to clarify the location of the information display area 601 on the game control board 600. The shape and size of the illustrated GND pattern 604 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. The GND pattern 604 only needs to be at the periphery of the solid portion around the information display area 601 and the screw hole 602a, and may be more complicated and may have a size that extends over the entire substrate. .

  FIG. 70 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 600, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 600 has an information display back surface area 601a (shown by broken lines), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 604a (shown by vertical hatching) on the back surface.

  The information display back area 601a is an area corresponding to the back of the information display area 601. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower right corner when observing the back surface of the game control board 600 with the information display back region 601a (information display region 601) on the lower side. The GND pattern 604a includes an information display back surface area 601a. That is, the information display back surface area 601a is also a GND pattern (GND solid).

  Next, the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to the fourth embodiment. First, the information display position in the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. The information display area 601 is a rectangle having one side along the edge of the game control board 600 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the edge of the game control board 600 as a short side. The information display area 601 divides the short side of the width d1 into two by the width d2 on the end side of the game control board 600 and the width d3 on the inner side. The information display area 601 has an information display section 606a on an end side of the bisected area and an information non-display section 606b on the inner side. Note that the width d2 and the width d3 may be the same or different.

  The information display section 606a has an information display pattern 605 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the conductor pattern on the periphery. The information display pattern 605 displays necessary information on the game control board 600 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 605 indicates a maker (or a sales maker) of the game control board 600.

  The information non-display portion 606b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and has a function as a gap for preventing the information display pattern 605 and the GND pattern 604 from approaching each other on the long side of the information display region 601. Thereby, the game control board 600 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 605. In such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to check the game control board 600.

  In addition, the game control board 600 reduces the influence of the information display pattern 605 as a noise source on the GND pattern 604. From such a viewpoint, it is desirable that the game control board 600 sets the information display portion 606a and the information non-display portion 606b by making the width d3 larger than the width d2.

  Next, FIG. 71 (2) shows details of the information display pattern 605. The information display pattern 605 is formed as a character string by the conductor pattern 605a, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 600 is “Ko, Inc.”. The conductor pattern 605a is independent of, that is, insulated from, the GND pattern 604. The conductor pattern 605a is independent of the GND pattern 604a, that is, insulated. Thus, the conductor pattern 605a has a property of being a noise source, but its influence is limited by the information non-display portion 606b.

  Next, FIG. 71 (3) shows a modification of the information display pattern 605. The information display pattern 607 is formed as a character string by the conductor pattern 607a, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 600 is “Ko, Inc.”. The conductor pattern 607a is independent of, that is, insulated from, the GND pattern 604.

  On the other hand, the conductor pattern 607a has a via 607b and is electrically connected to the GND pattern 604a. This limits the properties of the conductor pattern 607a that can be a noise source. The conductor pattern 607a is preferably provided with one or more vias 607b in all the independent conductor patterns, but may be limited to a part.

  Next, a first modified example (modified example 1) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to Modification Example 1 of the fourth embodiment. First, the information display area 611 of the game control board 610 will be described with reference to FIG. The game control board 610 is different from the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment in that the game control board 610 has an information display area 611 instead of the information display area 601, and the other points are the same.

  The information display area 611 is a rectangle having one side along the edge of the game control board 610 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the edge of the game control board 610 as a short side. In the information display area 611, the short side of the width d4 is divided into three by the width d5 on the inner side of the game control board 610, the width d7 on the end side, and the width d6 therebetween. The information display area 611 is an information display section 615a, an information display section 615b, and an information display section 615c in order from the inner side of the divided area. Note that the width d5, the width d6, and the width d7 may be the same or different.

  The information display section 615a has an information display pattern 612 formed by a conductor pattern independent of a conductor pattern on the periphery. The information display pattern 612 displays necessary information on the game control board 610 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 612 displays a logo of a manufacturer (or a sales maker) of the game control board 610. The information display unit 615a displays information by extracting a conductor pattern based on a solid conductor pattern. Therefore, the information displayed on the information display section 615a has an aspect of the cut pattern formation information formed by the cut pattern.

  The information non-display portion 615b has an information display pattern 613 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the conductor pattern on the periphery. The information display pattern 613 displays necessary information on the game control board 610 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 613 displays the name of a manufacturer (or a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 610. The information display section 615b displays information by arranging a conductor pattern on a blank base having no conductor pattern. Therefore, the information displayed on the information display portion 615b has an aspect of conductor pattern formation information formed of a conductor pattern.

  The information non-display portion 615c has an information display pattern 614 formed by a conductor pattern independent of a conductor pattern on the periphery. The information display pattern 614 displays required information on the game control board 610 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 614 displays the board management number of the game control board 610.

  In the game control board 610, the back surface of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c may be a solid part of the conductor pattern or a solid part of the conductor pattern. In the game control board 610, the back surfaces of the information display portions 615a, 615b, and 615c may be a combination of a solid portion and a solid portion of the conductor pattern. For example, the game control board 610 sets the back surface of the information display section 615a (the area corresponding to the information display section 615a) as a solid area and sets the back surface of the information display section 615b (the area corresponding to the information display section 615b) as a solid section. can do. Thereby, the game control board 610 can change the observation mode (for example, the observation mode of transmission observation described later) for each of the information display units 615a, 615b, and 615c.

  Next, FIG. 72 (2) shows the details of the information display pattern 612. The information display pattern 612 is formed as a logo by the conductor pattern 612a and the cutout pattern 612b, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 610 is “Ko, Inc.” specified by the logo “KOH”. The conductor pattern 612a is independent of, that is, insulated from, the GND pattern 604. The conductor pattern 612a has a planar conductor pattern surface serving as a logo base. The extraction pattern 612b forms a logo together with the conductor pattern 612a by being inside the logo base and having no conductor pattern (pulling out).

  As described above, when different pieces of information are written side by side in the information display area 611, one piece of information is used as extracted pattern formation information, and the other piece of information is used as conductor pattern formation information. Thereby, the game control board 610 clarifies the division of two different pieces of information.

  Next, FIG. 72 (3) shows a modification of the information display pattern 612. The information display pattern 613 is formed as a logo by the conductor pattern 613a and the punching pattern 613b, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 610 is “Ko, Inc.” specified by the logo “KOH”. The conductor pattern 613a is independent of, that is, insulated from, the GND pattern 604.

  On the other hand, the conductor pattern 613a has a via 613c and is electrically connected to the GND pattern 604a. This limits the properties of the conductor pattern 613a that can be a noise source. The conductor pattern 613a is desirably provided with one or more vias 613c in all of the independent conductor patterns, but may be limited to a part.

  Next, a second modification (modification 2) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment. First, FIG. 73 (1) describes the information display area 622 and the GND pattern 621 of the game control board 620. The game control board 620 has an information display area 622 instead of the information display area 601 and a GND pattern 621 instead of the GND pattern 604 as compared with the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment. And the other points are the same.

  The information display area 622 is a rectangle having one side along the edge of the game control board 620 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the edge of the game control board 620 as a short side. The information display area 622 divides the short side into two, and the end side of the bisected area is the information display part 622a, and the inside is the information non-display part 622b.

  The information display portion 622a has an information display pattern 623 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the conductor pattern on the periphery. The information display pattern 623 displays required information on the game control board 620 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 623 displays a maker (or a sales maker) of the game control board 620.

  The information non-display portion 622b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and has a function as a gap for preventing the information display pattern 623 and the GND pattern 621 from approaching each other on the long side of the information display region 622. Thereby, the game control board 620 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 623. In such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to check the game control board 620. In addition, the game control board 620 reduces the influence of the information display pattern 623 as a noise source on the GND pattern 621.

  The GND pattern 621 includes an information display section 621a. The information display unit 621a displays an information display pattern 625 that displays information by extracting a conductor pattern using the GND pattern 621 as a solid base. The information display pattern 625 displays required information related to the game control board 620 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 625 displays the board management number of the game control board 620. Such an information display pattern 625 does not need to unnecessarily reduce the area of the GND pattern 621 on the game control board 620, while displaying required information on the game control board 620.

  Further, as described above, when different pieces of information are described side by side, the game control board 620 sets one piece of information to be the blank pattern forming information based on the solid pattern of the GND pattern 621 and the other piece of information to be the conductor pattern forming information. Thereby, the game control board 620 clarifies the division of two different pieces of information.

  Note that the information display region 622 and the information display portion 621a may be arranged close to each other or may be separately arranged. Further, the information display area 622 may have a configuration in which the information non-display section 622b is not required when the information display area 622 and the information display section 621a are arranged close to each other.

  Next, FIG. 73 (2) describes the information display area 628 and the GND pattern 629 of the game control board 627. Note that the game control board 620 has an information display area 628 instead of the information display area 601 and a GND pattern 629 instead of the GND pattern 604 as compared with the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment. And the other points are the same.

  The information display area 628 is a rectangle in which one side along the edge of the game control board 627 is a long side and a side orthogonal to the edge of the game control board 627 is a short side. The information display area 628 includes an information display section 628a.

  The information display section 628a has an information display pattern 623 formed by a conductor pattern independent of a conductor pattern on the periphery. The information display pattern 623 displays required information on the game control board 627 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 623 displays a maker (or a sales maker) of the game control board 620.

  The GND pattern 629 includes an information display section 629a and an information non-display section 629b. The information display section 629a displays an information display pattern 625 for displaying information by extracting a conductor pattern using the GND pattern 629 as a solid base. The information display pattern 625 displays necessary information related to the game control board 627 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 625 displays the board management number of the game control board 627. Such an information display pattern 625 does not need to unnecessarily reduce the area of the GND pattern 629 on the game control board 627 while displaying required information on the game control board 627.

  The information non-display portion 629b is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface, and a gap for preventing the information display pattern 623 and the information display pattern 625 from approaching each other on the long side of the information display region 628. As a function. Thereby, the game control board 627 improves the visibility of the information display patterns 623 and 625. In such a gaming machine 10, the confirmation of the game control board 627 is easy.

  In addition, as described above, when different information is described in parallel, the game control board 627 sets one piece of information to be blank pattern forming information based on the GND pattern 629 and the other piece of information to be conductor pattern forming information. Thereby, the game control board 627 clarifies the division of two different information.

  Note that the information display region 628 and the information display portion 629a may be arranged close to each other or may be separately arranged. Further, the GND pattern 629 may have a configuration in which the information non-display section 629b is not required when the information display area 628 and the information display section 629a are arranged close to each other.

  Next, a third modification (modification 3) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment. The game control board 630 is rectangular, and the information display area 632 is arranged at one of the four corners, for example, at the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

  The information display area 632 is a rectangle having a long side and a short side, with the lower left corner of the game control board 630 as a corner. The information display area 632 includes an information display portion 632a and an information non-display portion 632b based on a solid portion where no conductor pattern is formed, and shares the same solid portion as the screw hole 602a.

  The information display area 632 divides the short side of the width d1 into two with the width d2 on the end side of the game control board 630 and the width d3 on the inside. In the information display area 632, the end side of the bisected area is an information display section 632a, and the inner side is an information non-display section 632b. Note that the width d2 and the width d3 may be the same or different.

  The information display portion 632a has an information display pattern 634 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the conductor pattern on the periphery. The information display pattern 634 displays required information on the game control board 630 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 634 indicates a maker (or a sales maker) of the game control board 630. Since the information display unit 632a shares the same solid portion as the screw hole 602a, it is easy to find the information display unit 632a based on the screw hole 602a.

  The information non-display portion 632b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and has a function as a gap for preventing the information display pattern 634 and the GND pattern 631 from approaching each other on the long side of the information display region 632. Thereby, the game control board 630 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 634. In such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to confirm the game control board 630. In addition, the game control board 630 reduces the influence of the information display pattern 634 as a noise source on the GND pattern 631. From such a viewpoint, it is desirable that the game control board 630 sets the information display portion 632a and the information non-display portion 632b by making the width d3 larger than the width d2.

  Next, a fourth modification (Modification 4) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a view illustrating an example of a front surface and a back surface of a game control board according to Modification 4 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 640 includes necessary connectors and components on a component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 640 includes the connectors 530a and 530b, the resistors 541 and 542, the processor 532, and the like illustrated in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

  FIG. 75 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 640, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 640 has an information display area 641 (shown by hatching), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 642 (shown by vertical hatching) on the surface.

  The information display area 641 displays control board information regarding the game control board 640. The information display area 641 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed separately from the GND pattern 642 based on a solid portion where no conductor pattern is formed. The information display area 641 is rectangular and one side thereof is provided in contact with one side of the game control board 640.

  The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602, and is located near the information display area 641. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower left corner when observing the surface of the game control board 600 with the information display area 641 on the lower side. The screw hole 602a is provided in a solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 642. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and has two lower left corners in contact with two lower left corners of the game control board 640.

  The GND pattern 642 is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 642 is provided on the periphery of the information display area 641. As a result, the GND pattern 642 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 641 formed in the solid portion, and clarifying the location of the information display area 641 on the game control board 640. The GND pattern 642 is provided on the periphery of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the solid area around the information display area 641 and the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 642 interposed therebetween, the screw hole 602a also has a role to clarify the location of the information display area 641 in the game control board 640. Note that the shape and size of the illustrated GND pattern 642 is an example, and is not limited thereto. The GND pattern 642 only needs to be on the periphery of the solid portion around the information display area 641 and the screw hole 602a, and may be more complicated and may have a size that extends over the entire substrate. .

  FIG. 75 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 640, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 640 has an information display back area 644 (shown in white), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 643 (shown by vertical hatching) on the back.

  The information display back surface region 644 is a region corresponding to the back surface of the information display region 641. The information display back surface area 644 is a solid portion having no conductor pattern. The game control board 640 partially transmits light in a region having no conductor pattern, and cannot transmit light in a region having the conductor pattern. This is because the game control board 640 is configured such that the base material constituting the game control board can partially transmit light and the conductor pattern blocks the light.

  Here, how the information display area 641 looks when observed will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an example of how the game control board looks when observing the game according to the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 76 (1) shows how the normal observation of the game control board 640 looks. The normal observation is an observation that relies on a light source that irradiates the surface of the game control board 640. The game control board 640 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 645 under a sufficient amount of light. On the other hand, the game control board 640 uses the positional relationship between the screw hole 602a and the information display area 641 and the contrast between the GND pattern 642 and the information display area 641 as clues even under an insufficient amount of light. In some cases, the position of the information display pattern 645 can be specified to obtain a certain degree of visibility. However, the game control board 640 may not be able to obtain the visibility of the information display pattern 645 under an insufficient amount of light such as a game room installation environment.

  FIG. 76 (2) shows the appearance of the transmission observation of the game control board 640 which is useful when the light source for irradiating the surface of the game control board 640 cannot be relied on. The transmission observation is an observation relying on the light source on the back side of the game control board 640, and brightens the base (opening portion) of the information display area 641 to make the contrast between the base of the information display area 641 and the conductor pattern stand out. be able to. The game control board 640 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 645 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 640 by transmission observation.

  This allows the game control board 640 to easily specify the position of the information display area 641. Further, the game control board 640 facilitates information observation in the information display area 641. In addition, the game control board 640 enables information observation that relies on light leaking from the back side of the gaming machine 10 in a state where external light is insufficient in a game arcade installation environment. Further, the game control board 640 facilitates information observation relying on transmitted light not only in an environment where the game control board 640 is installed but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

  Note that the size, position, and shape of the information display area 641 and the information display back area 644 do not necessarily need to completely match. It is sufficient that the information display area 641 and the information display rear area 644 overlap in a range where transmission observation is possible.

  Next, a fifth modification (modification 5) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to Modification 5 of the fourth embodiment. The game control board 650 is rectangular, and the information display areas 651 and 653 are arranged at one of the four corners, for example, at the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

  The information display area 651 is a rectangle having one side along the edge of the game control board 650 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the edge of the game control board 650 as a short side. The information display area 653 is a rectangle which is in contact with the information display area 651 with one side along the long side of the information display area 651 being a long side. Therefore, the information display area 653 faces the end of the game control board 650 across the information display area 651. In other words, the information display area 651 is located between the end of the game control board 650 and the information display area 653.

  The information display area 651 includes an information display pattern 652 formed by a conductor pattern independent of a peripheral conductor pattern in an area based on a solid portion having no conductor pattern.

  The information display area 653 is provided in the GND pattern 655. The information display area 653 is a GND (solid GND) having a planar conductor pattern surface, and includes an information display pattern 654 formed by printing (for example, silk printing).

  The information display patterns 652 and 654 display necessary information on the game control board 650 from the appearance. For example, the information display patterns 652 and 654 indicate a manufacturer (or a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 650.

  As described above, the game control board 650 displays the same information in different forms by the information display patterns 652 and 654. Therefore, even when the visibility of one of the information display patterns 652 and 654 is not sufficient, the game control board 650 may be able to expect that the visibility of the other is sufficient. In addition, even when the visibility of both the information display patterns 652 and 654 is not sufficient, the game control board 650 may be able to expect sufficient visibility by mutual complementation. For example, the game control board 650 visually recognizes the information display pattern 654 formed by silk printing even when the information display pattern 652 formed by the conductor pattern cannot be visually recognized due to insufficient light amount or reflection of light. May be possible. Conversely, even when the game control board 650 cannot visually recognize the information display pattern 654 formed by silk printing due to insufficient light quantity or light reflection, the information display pattern formed by the conductor pattern 652 may be visible. As described above, the game control board 650 can display information corresponding to a wider viewing condition by arranging the information display patterns 652 and 654 having different observation performances in parallel.

  Further, as described in the fourth modification, the game control board 650 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 652 by transmission observation by making the back surface of the information display area 651 solid. Although the game control board 650 displays the same information in the information display patterns 652 and 654 in different forms, the information display patterns 652 and 654 may display different information. For example, the game control board 650 displays the logo of the manufacturer of the game control board 650 by silk printing on the information display area 653, and displays the manufacturer name of the game control board 650 by a conductor pattern on the information display area 651. There may be.

  Next, a sixth modification (modification 6) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a view illustrating an example of how the game control board according to the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment looks when observed. FIG. 78 (1) shows the appearance of normal observation of the game control board 660. The game control board 660 is rectangular, and the information display areas 661 and 663 are arranged at one of the four corners, for example, at the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

  The information display area 661 is a rectangle having one side along the edge of the game control board 660 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 660 as a short side. The information display area 663 is a rectangle in contact with the information display area 661, with one side along the long side of the information display area 661 being a long side. Therefore, the information display area 663 faces the end of the game control board 660 across the information display area 661. In other words, the information display area 661 is located between the end of the game control board 660 and the information display area 663.

  The information display area 661 includes an information display pattern 662 formed by a conductor pattern independent of a peripheral conductor pattern in an area based on a solid portion having no conductor pattern. The information display area 663 includes an information display pattern 664 formed by printing (for example, silk printing) in an area based on a solid portion having no conductor pattern.

  The information display patterns 662 and 664 display necessary information on the game control board 660 from the appearance. For example, the information display patterns 662 and 664 display a manufacturer (or a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 660.

  The normal observation of the game control board 660 is an observation relying on a light source that irradiates the surface of the game control board 660. The game control board 660 can obtain good visibility of the information display patterns 662 and 664 under a sufficient amount of light. Further, the game control board 660 displays the same information in different forms by the information display patterns 662 and 664. Therefore, even when the visibility of one of the information display patterns 662 and 664 is not sufficient, the game control board 660 may be able to expect that the visibility of the other is sufficient. Further, even when the visibility of both the information display patterns 662 and 664 is not sufficient, the game control board 660 may be able to expect sufficient visibility by mutual complementation. For example, the game control board 660 visually recognizes the information display pattern 664 formed by silk printing even when the information display pattern 662 formed by the conductor pattern cannot be visually recognized due to insufficient light amount or light reflection. May be possible. On the other hand, even when the game control board 660 cannot visually recognize the information display pattern 664 formed by silk printing due to insufficient light quantity or reflection of light, the information display pattern formed by the conductor pattern 662 may be visible. As described above, the game control board 660 can display information corresponding to a wider viewing condition by arranging the information display patterns 662 and 664 having different observation performances in parallel.

  On the other hand, the game control board 660 can control the positional relationship between the screw holes 602a and the information display areas 661 and 663 and the contrast between the GND pattern 665 and the information display areas 661 and 663 even under an insufficient amount of light. In some cases, the position of the information display patterns 662 and 664 can be specified using the key as a clue to obtain a certain degree of visibility. However, the game control board 660 may not be able to obtain the visibility of the information display patterns 662 and 664 under an insufficient amount of light such as a game room installation environment.

  However, the game control board 660 makes the back of the information display area 661 solid and the back of the information display area 663 solid as described in the fourth modification. FIG. 78 (2) shows the appearance of transmission observation of such a game control board 640.

  The transmission observation is an observation relying on the light source on the back side of the game control board 660, and brightens the base (opening portion) of the information display area 661 to make the contrast between the base of the information display area 661 and the conductor pattern stand out. be able to. The game control board 660 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 662 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by transmission observation.

  Note that the game control board 660 cannot observe transmitted light in the information display area 663 because the back surface of the information display area 663 is solid GND. Therefore, the game control board 660 cannot expect good visibility of the information display pattern 664 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by transmission observation. However, the game control board 660 can limit the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by the GND solid on the back surface of the information display area 663. Therefore, the game control board 660 can obtain better visibility of the information display pattern 664 in normal observation as compared with the case where the back surface of the information display area 663 is solid.

  This allows the game control board 660 to easily specify the position of the information display area 661. Further, the game control board 660 facilitates information observation in the information display area 661. Further, the game control board 660 enables information observation relying on light leaking from the back side of the gaming machine 10 in a state where external light is not sufficient in a game arcade installation environment. Further, the game control board 660 facilitates information observation relying on transmitted light not only in an environment where the game control board 660 is installed but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

  It should be noted that the size, position, and shape of the information display area 661 and the solid portion on the back surface do not necessarily need to completely match. It suffices that the information display area 661 and the solid portion on the back surface thereof overlap in a range where transmission observation is possible.

  Next, a seventh modification (modification 7) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a view illustrating an example of a front surface and a back surface of a game control board according to Modification 7 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 670 includes necessary connectors and components on a component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 670 includes the connectors 530a and 530b, the resistors 541 and 542, the processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

  FIG. 79 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 670, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 670 has an information display area 671 (shown by hatching), screw holes 602a and 602b, and a GND pattern 672 (shown by vertical hatching) on the surface.

  The information display area 671 displays control board information regarding the game control board 670. The information display area 671 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed separately from the GND pattern 672 based on a solid portion where no conductor pattern is formed. The information display area 671 is rectangular and has one side provided in contact with one side of the game control board 670. The information display area 671 is located at the lower left when observing the surface of the game control board 670 with one side in contact with the game control board 670 facing down.

  The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located near the information display area 671. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower left corner when observing the surface of the game control board 670 with the information display area 671 on the lower side. The screw hole 602a is provided in a solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 672. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and has two lower left corners in contact with two lower left corners of the game control board 670.

  The screw hole 602b is one of the screw holes 602, and is located away from the information display area 671. The screw hole 602b is located at the lower right corner when the surface of the game control board 670 is observed with the information display area 671 on the lower side.

  The GND pattern 672 is GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 672 is provided on the periphery of the information display area 671. As a result, the GND pattern 672 has a role of clearly indicating the outer edge of the information display area 671 formed in the solid portion, and clarifying the location of the information display area 671 on the game control board 670. The GND pattern 672 is provided on the periphery of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the solid area around the information display area 671 and the screw hole 602a are adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 672 interposed therebetween, the screw hole 602a also has a role to clarify the location of the information display area 671 in the game control board 670.

  FIG. 79 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 670, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 670 has an information display area 673 (shown by hatching), screw holes 602a and 602b, and a GND pattern 674 (shown by vertical hatching) on the back surface.

  The information display area 673 also displays control board information on the game control board 670, similarly to the information display area 671. The information display area 673 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed separately from the GND pattern 674 based on a solid portion where no conductor pattern is formed. The information display area 673 is rectangular and one side of the information display area 673 is provided in contact with one side of the game control board 670. Similarly to the information display area 671, the information display area 673 is also located at the lower left when observing the back surface of the game control board 670 with one side in contact with the game control board 670 on the lower side.

  As described above, when the information display area 671 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (the component mounting surface) of the game control board 670, the information display area 673 is formed on the back surface (the solder surface) of the game control board 670. ) At a predetermined position (lower left). That is, the game control board 670 arranges the information display area 673 on the rear surface in the same positional relationship as the information display area 671 on the front surface.

  Next, an eighth modification (modification 8) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the front and back surfaces of the game control board of Modification 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a view illustrating an example of a front surface and a back surface of a game control board according to Modification Example 8 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 680 includes necessary connectors and components on a component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 680 includes the connectors 530a and 530b, the resistors 541 and 542, the processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

  FIG. 80 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 680, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 680 has an information display area 681 (shown by hatching), screw holes 602a and 602b, and a GND pattern 682 (shown by vertical hatching) on the surface.

  The information display area 681 displays control board information regarding the game control board 680. The information display area 681 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed separately from the GND pattern 682 based on a solid portion where no conductor pattern is formed. The information display area 681 is rectangular and has one side provided in contact with one side of the game control board 680. The information display area 681 is located at the lower left when observing the surface of the game control board 680 with one side contacting the game control board 680 facing down.

  The screw hole 602a is one of the screw holes 602, and is located near the information display area 681. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower left corner when observing the surface of the game control board 680 with the information display area 681 on the lower side. The screw hole 602a is provided in a solid portion where the conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 682. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and has two lower left corners in contact with two lower left corners of the game control board 680.

  The screw hole 602b is one of the screw holes 602, and is located away from the information display area 681. The screw hole 602b is located at the lower right corner when the surface of the game control board 680 is observed with the information display area 681 on the lower side.

  The GND pattern 682 is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 682 is provided on the periphery of the information display area 681. As a result, the GND pattern 682 has a role to clearly indicate the outer edge of the information display area 681 formed in the solid portion and to clarify the location of the information display area 681 on the game control board 680. The GND pattern 682 is provided on the periphery of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the solid area around the information display area 681 and the screw hole 602a is adjacent to each other with the GND pattern 682 interposed therebetween, the screw hole 602a also has a role to clarify the location of the information display area 681 on the game control board 680.

  FIG. 80 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 680, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 680 has an information display area 683 (shown by hatching), screw holes 602a and 602b, and a GND pattern 684 (shown by vertical hatching) on the back surface.

  The information display area 683 also displays control board information on the game control board 680, similarly to the information display area 681. The information display area 683 displays control board information using a conductor pattern formed separately from the GND pattern 684 based on a solid portion where no conductor pattern is formed. The information display area 683 is rectangular and has one side provided in contact with one side of the game control board 680. The information display area 683 is a position corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 681, and is located at the lower right when observing the back surface of the game control board 680 with one side in contact with the game control board 680 facing down.

  As described above, when the information display area 681 is located at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (the component mounting surface) of the game control board 680, the information display area 683 is located on the back surface (the solder surface) of the game control board 680. ) At the position corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 681 (lower right). That is, the game control board 680 arranges the information display area 683 on the back side in a positional relationship corresponding to the information display area 681 on the front side.

  Next, the information display areas 681 and 683 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to Modification 8 of the fourth embodiment. First, the information display position in the information display area 681 will be described with reference to FIG. The information display area 681 is a rectangle having one long side along the edge of the game control board 680 as a long side and a short side orthogonal to the end of the game control board 680. The information display area 681 divides the short side into two parts, and the end side of the bisected area is the information display part 681a, and the inside is the information non-display part 681b. In addition, the width of the short side bisected may be the same or different.

  The information display portion 681a has an information display pattern 685 formed by a conductor pattern independent of a peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 685 displays required information related to the game control board 680 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 685 indicates a maker (or a sales maker) of the game control board 680.

  The information non-display portion 681b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and has a function as a gap for preventing the information display pattern 685 and the GND pattern 682 from approaching each other on the long side of the information display region 681. Thereby, the game control board 680 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 685. In such a gaming machine 10, the confirmation of the game control board 680 is easy.

  Next, the information display position in the information display area 683 will be described with reference to FIG. The information display area 683 is a rectangle having one side along the edge of the game control board 680 as a long side and a side orthogonal to the edge of the game control board 680 as a short side. The information display area 683 divides the short side into two parts, and sets the inner side of the bisected area as the information display part 683a and the end side as the information non-display part 683b. That is, the back surface of the information display unit 681a is the information non-display unit 683b, and the back surface of the information display unit 683a is the information non-display unit 681b. In addition, the width of the short side bisected may be the same or different.

  The information display portion 683a has an information display pattern 686 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the conductor pattern on the periphery. The information display pattern 686 displays required information on the game control board 680 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 686 indicates a maker (or a sales maker) of the game control board 680.

  The information non-display portion 683b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and serves as a gap for preventing the information display pattern 686 and the end of the game control board 680 from approaching each other on the long side of the information display region 681. Has functions. Thereby, the game control board 680 makes it easy to specify the position of the information display pattern 686 based on the information non-display section 683b. Such position identification is useful because the back surface of the game control board 680 is not the component mounting surface, and the gaming machine 10 can easily check the game control board 680.

  Next, how the information display areas 681 and 683 are viewed during transmission observation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a view illustrating an example of how the game control board is viewed when observing the game control board according to Modification Example 8 of the fourth embodiment.

  This shows how the transmission observation of the game control board 680 is useful when the light source that irradiates the surface of the game control board 680 cannot be relied on. The transmission observation is an observation that relies on a light source on the back surface side of the game control board 680, and brightens the bases (opening portions) of the information display areas 681, 683, and the base of the information display areas 681, 683, and the GND pattern. The contrast with the conductor patterns of 682, 684 and the information display patterns 685, 686 can be emphasized. The game control board 680 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 685 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 680 through transmission observation from the surface. In addition, the game control board 680 reversely displays the information display pattern 686 by transmission observation from the surface, but can indicate the presence and position of the information display pattern 686 from the surface.

  Note that the game control board 680 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 686 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 680 by transmission observation from the back surface. In addition, the game control board 680 reversely displays the information display pattern 685 by transmission observation from the back surface, but can show the existence and position of the information display pattern 685 from the back surface.

  Thereby, the game control board 680 makes it easy to specify the positions of the information display areas 681 and 683. Further, the game control board 680 facilitates information observation in the information display areas 681 and 683. In addition, the game control board 680 enables information observation relying on light leaking from the back side of the gaming machine 10 in a state where external light is not sufficient in a game arcade installation environment. Further, the game control board 680 facilitates information observation relying on transmitted light not only in an environment where the game control board 640 is installed but also in other working environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

  It should be noted that the size, position, and shape of the information display areas 681, 683 do not necessarily need to completely match. It is sufficient that the information display areas 681 and 683 overlap in a range where transmission observation is possible. The information displayed by the information display patterns 685 and 686 does not necessarily need to be the same information, and may be different information. It is desirable that the information display patterns 685 and 686 do not overlap at the time of transmission observation. However, the information display patterns 685 and 686 may partially overlap because their existence can be easily grasped.

  Next, a ninth modification (modification 9) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a view illustrating an example of a front surface and a back surface of a game control board of Modification Example 9 of the fourth embodiment. Although not shown, the game control board 690 includes necessary connectors and components on a component mounting surface. For example, the game control board 690 includes the connectors 530a and 530b, the resistors 541 and 542, the processor 532, and the like shown in FIGS. 50 and 52 on the component mounting surface.

  FIG. 83 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 690, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 690 has a surface mounting area 691 (shown by hatching) on the surface. The surface mounting area 691 is an area where components for surface mounting are mounted on the surface of the game control board 690. The components for surface mounting include, for example, IC packages such as SOP (Small Outline Package) and QFP (Quad Flat Package), chip resistors, chip capacitors, and connectors.

  The surface mounting area 691 is rectangular and one side thereof is provided in contact with one side of the game control board 690. The surface mounting area 691 is located at the lower left when observing the surface of the game control board 690 with one side in contact with the game control board 690 facing down. The surface mounting area 691 may be provided without contacting one side of the game control board 690.

  FIG. 83 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 690, that is, the solder surface. The game control board 690 has an information display area 692 (shown by hatching) and a GND pattern 693 (shown by vertical hatching) on the back surface. In the game control board 690, since the surface mounting area 691 has no through hole, the information display area 692 can be arranged on the back surface of the surface mounting area 691 without being hindered by the through hole.

  The information display area 692 displays control board information regarding the game control board 690. The information display area 692 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed separately from the GND pattern 693 based on a solid portion where no conductor pattern is formed. The information display area 692 is rectangular and has one side thereof provided in contact with one side of the game control board 690. The information display area 692 is a position corresponding to the back surface of the front surface mounting area 691, and is located at the lower right when the back surface of the game control board 690 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 690 facing down.

  As described above, when the surface mounting area 691 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (the component mounting surface) of the game control board 690, the information display area 692 is formed on the back surface (the solder surface) of the game control board 690. ) And is disposed at a position (lower right) corresponding to the back surface of the surface mounting area 691. That is, the game control board 690 arranges the information display area 692 on the back surface in a positional relationship corresponding to the surface mounting area 691 on the front surface.

  Note that the game control board 690 may have a surface-mounted component mounted on the surface-mounted area 691 during non-mass production, and may not have the surface-mounted component mounted on the surface-mounted area 691 during mass production. Non-mass production refers to, for example, development or pre-mass inspection, not mass production. The game control board 690 surface mounts a surface mounting component (for example, a driver IC) for outputting an inspection signal at the time of development or inspection on the surface mounting area 691. In addition, the game control board 690 does not surface mount components on the surface mounting area 691 during mass production, that is, during operation in the market. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 reduces the manufacturing cost of the game control board 690 and suppresses an improper act based on the acquisition of the inspection signal. In addition, the game control board 690 does not mount the surface-mounted components on the surface-mounted area 691, so that when the surface-mounted area 691 is formed as a solid portion, transmission observation of the information display area 692 can be easily performed. .

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, GND patterns 604, 604a, and information) on a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface (for example, a back surface) that is a back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 600) capable of forming the display pattern 605) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid portion of the conductor pattern (for example, information display area 601) in a predetermined area of the first surface, and an information display section (for example, information display section 606a) for displaying control board information relating to the control board. Is formed by a conductor pattern (for example, an information display pattern 605) independent of a peripheral conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 604), and a solid portion of the conductor pattern (at a position corresponding to the information display portion on the second surface) For example, a GND pattern 604a and an information display back surface area 601a) are provided (see FIGS. 70 and 71).

  (2) The solid blank portion of (1) has one side as an end of the control board, and the other side is in contact with the peripheral conductor pattern, and is closer to the edge of the control board than the peripheral conductor pattern to display information. The parts are arranged (see FIG. 71 (1)).

  (3) The control board information of (1) or (2) (for example, the conductor pattern 607a) includes a solid portion of the conductor pattern provided on the second surface (for example, a GND pattern 604a, an information display back surface area 601a). Electrical connection is made with a via (for example, via 607b) (see FIG. 71 (3)).

  (4) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, GND patterns 642, 643) on a first surface (for example, front surface) and a second surface (for example, back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 640) that can be formed is provided. The control board is provided with a solid portion (for example, an information display area 641) of the conductor pattern in a predetermined area of the first surface, and the information display section for displaying control board information on the control board is provided with a peripheral conductor pattern (for example, The conductive pattern is formed by a conductor pattern (for example, the information display pattern 645) independent of the GND pattern 642), and a solid portion of the conductor pattern (for example, the information display back surface area 644) is provided on the second surface at a position corresponding to the information display portion. ) Are provided (see FIGS. 75 and 76).

  (5) The information display section of (4) is formed by a conductor pattern (for example, the information display pattern 645) independent of the conductor pattern (for example, the GND pattern 642) on the periphery (see FIG. 76 (1)).

  (6) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, GND patterns 682, 684) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) that is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (eg, a game control board 680) that can be formed is provided. The control board is provided with a solid portion of the conductor pattern in a predetermined area of the first surface (for example, a lower left corner when the game control board 680 is oriented in a predetermined direction and observed from the surface), and control board information on the control board is provided. (For example, an information display area 681) is formed by a conductor pattern, and a position corresponding to the first information display section on the second surface (for example, a game control board 680 is set at a predetermined position). Behind the lower left corner when observing from the front with the orientation, ie, the lower right corner when observing from the back with the game control board 680 in a predetermined orientation), the solid pattern of the conductor pattern is provided, and the control for the control board is provided. A second information display section (for example, information display area 683) for displaying board information is formed by a conductor pattern (see FIG. 80).

  (7) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, GND patterns 672 and 674) on the first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) that is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 670) that can be formed is provided. The control board is provided with a solid portion of the conductor pattern in a predetermined area of the first surface (for example, a lower left corner when the game control board 670 is oriented in a predetermined direction and observed from the surface), and control board information on the control board is provided. Is formed by a conductor pattern, and a position corresponding to the first information display portion on the second surface (e.g., the game control board 670 is set at a predetermined position). A solid portion of the conductor pattern is provided at the lower left corner when viewed from the back side and the second information display portion (for example, information display area 673) for displaying control board information on the control board is connected to the conductor pattern. (See FIG. 79).

  (8) The gaming machine 10 can form a conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 693) on a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface (for example, a back surface) which is a back surface side of the first surface. Control board (for example, a game control board 690). The control board mounts a predetermined surface mount component (for example, an IC package (SOP)) during non-mass production, and provides a predetermined area (for example, surface mount area 691) on the first surface where no surface mount component is mounted during mass production. An information display unit (for example, information display area 692) for displaying control board information relating to the control board is placed on the second surface at a position corresponding to a predetermined area (for example, behind the surface mounting area 691) by a conductor pattern. It is formed and provided (see FIG. 83).

  (9) The gaming machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 604, an information display pattern) on a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface (for example, a back surface) which is a back surface side of the first surface. 612, 613, 614) can be formed (for example, a game control board 610). The control board adjoins first control board information (for example, information displayed on information display section 615a) and second control board information (for example, information displayed on information display section 615b) related to the control board. When displaying, one of the first control board information and the second control board information is displayed by a conductor pattern (for example, an information display pattern 613) formed in a solid portion of the conductor pattern, and the other is a conductor. It is displayed by a blank pattern (for example, information display pattern 612) formed in a solid portion of the pattern (see FIG. 72).

  (10) When displaying the first control board information and the second control board information of (9) on the first face, the first control board information and the second control board are on the second face. An area corresponding to any one of the information is defined as a solid portion of the conductor pattern, and an area corresponding to the other is defined as a solid portion of the conductor pattern (see FIGS. 72 and 78).

  (11) Each of the first control board information and the second control board information of (9) or (10) is a conductor pattern (for example, an information display pattern) independent of a peripheral conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 604). 612, 613) (see FIG. 72).

  (12) The gaming machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 621, an information display pattern) on a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface (for example, a back surface) which is a back surface side of the first surface. 623) is provided (for example, a game control board 620). The control board has an information display section for displaying control board information relating to the control board, a blank pattern formed on at least one of the first surface and the second surface in a solid ground (for example, a GND pattern 604). (For example, information display pattern 625) (see FIG. 73).

  (13) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, a GND pattern 655, an information display pattern) on a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface (for example, a back surface) that is a back surface side of the first surface. 652) can be formed (for example, a game control board 650). The control board includes a first information display unit (for example, an information display pattern 652) that displays control board information related to the control board in a first form (for example, a conductor pattern), and a control board information that is a first form. A second information display unit (for example, an information display pattern 654) for displaying in a different second form (for example, silk printing) (see FIG. 77).

(14) The first information display unit and the second information display unit of (13) are arranged in parallel (see FIG. 77).
[Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment includes a noise reduction component that enables stable operation even when there is a non-mounting area where no electronic component is mounted on the board. Although a game control board will be described as an example of a board having a non-mounting area, the present invention can be applied to other boards such as an effect control board, a payout control board, a power supply board, a relay board, a sensor board, and a lamp board. . First, a game control device according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a view illustrating an example of the game control device of the fifth embodiment.

  The game control device 100b is supported by the front frame 12 via the mounting base 521, similarly to the game control device 100 (see FIG. 48). The game control device 100b includes the same board box 520 as the game control device 100 of the second embodiment, and accommodates a game control board 700 different from the game control device 100 of the second embodiment in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and includes an engaging portion 522 on the upper long side and a locking portion 523 on the opposite lower side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the board box 520, and includes engaged portions 522 a and 522 b corresponding to the engaging portions 522, and a locked portion 523 a corresponding to the locking portions 523. Is provided.

  The board box 520 engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b first, and places the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation axis. By being locked to the locked portion 523a, it is fixed to the mounting base 521. The board box 520 has an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as main structures, and holds the game control board 700 between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 (see FIG. 49).

  The caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw) caulks the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The caulking section 524 allows the user to switch between the caulked state and the caulked release state a predetermined number of times without leaving a trace. In addition, the substrate box 520 includes a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal is attached to the sealing portion 525, so that the presence or absence of opening of the substrate box 520 can be detected based on the state of the sealing seal.

  The game control board 700 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 700 is a two-layer board in which conductor patterns are formed on the front and back surfaces, the front surface is a component mounting surface, and the back surface is a solder surface. The game control board 700 includes a test circuit arrangement area 701, a test connector arrangement area 702, an input signal circuit arrangement area 703, and an input signal connector arrangement area 704 on the component mounting surface.

  The test circuit arrangement area 701 is an area where a test circuit is arranged. The test connector arrangement area 702 is an area where the test connector is arranged. The input signal circuit arrangement area 703 is an area where an input signal circuit is arranged. The input signal connector arrangement area 704 is an area where the input signal connector is arranged. The test circuit arrangement area 701 and the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 are arranged adjacent to the component mounting surface of the game control board 700.

  The test connector enables connection of a cable connecting the gaming machine 10 and an external device. For example, examples of the external device include a test device that performs an operation test of the gaming machine 10 and a verification device that performs an operation verification of the gaming machine 10. The input signal connector enables connection of a cable connecting the game control board 700 and other boards of the gaming machine 10. Alternatively, the input signal connector enables connection of a cable connecting the game control board 700 and an input sensor of the gaming machine 10.

  The input signal circuit area 703 and the input signal connector area 704 are indispensable areas for realizing the function of the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, the test circuit disposition area 701 and the test connector disposition area 702 are redundant areas for realizing the function of the gaming machine 10 and are areas for test use. The test applications include performance test applications and type test applications, as well as operation verification applications during the development process.

  Note that the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 are examples of a general circuit arrangement area and a general connector arrangement area which are originally used as a gaming machine. Therefore, the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 include an output signal circuit and an output signal connector, an input / output signal circuit and an input / output signal connector, other circuits and the like. May be an area in which the connector and the like are arranged.

  Next, the test circuit arrangement area 701, the test connector arrangement area 702, the input signal circuit arrangement area 703, and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 arranged on the component mounting surface of the game control board 700 will be described. I do. First, a game control board on which components are not mounted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is an example of a test circuit arrangement area, a test connector arrangement area, an input signal circuit arrangement area, and an input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (no components mounted) according to the fifth embodiment. FIG.

  The game control board 700a is in a state where components are not yet mounted on the test circuit arrangement area 701, the test connector arrangement area 702, the input signal circuit arrangement area 703, and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 ( (No component mounting).

  The test circuit arrangement area 701 is provided with a circuit pattern 711 including a conductor pattern, a through-hole, a via, and the like, which enable mounting of an electronic component for signal input / output for a test. For example, the circuit pattern 711 allows an integrated circuit IC2 constituting a buffer circuit as an electronic component and a bypass capacitor (pass capacitor) C2 for removing noise of a test circuit to be mounted near the integrated circuit IC2. The test connector arrangement area 702 is an area where a test connector CN2 for signal input / output for testing can be mounted. A preferred example near the integrated circuit IC2 is a position close to the power supply pin and the ground pin of the integrated circuit IC2.

  In the test circuit arrangement area 701 and the test connector arrangement area 702, the range of the test mounting area is clearly indicated by the test area range display 705. For example, the test area range display 705 specifies the range of the test mounting area by silk-screen rectangular display.

  In the test circuit arrangement area 701 and the test connector arrangement area 702, the name (use) of the test mounting area is specified by the test area name display 706. For example, the test area name display 706 clearly specifies the name of the test mounting area “for test” by a silk-screened rectangular display.

  In the test circuit arrangement area 701 and the test connector arrangement area 702, the shape of the test component is clearly indicated by the test component shape display 707. For example, the test part shape display 707 clearly indicates the outline of the integrated circuit IC2, the bypass capacitor C2, and the test connector CN2 by the outline display of silk printing.

  In the test circuit disposition area 701 and the test connector disposition area 702, the symbol of the test component is clearly indicated by the test component symbol display 708. For example, the test component symbol display 708 specifies the component symbol of the integrated circuit IC2, the bypass capacitor C2, and the test connector CN2 by silk-screen character display or numeric display.

  In the input signal circuit arrangement area 703, a circuit pattern 712 that can mount an electronic component for general (game) signal input use is provided including a conductor pattern, a through hole, a via, and the like. For example, the circuit pattern 712 enables the integrated circuit IC1 constituting a buffer circuit as an electronic component and the bypass capacitor C1 for removing noise of an input signal circuit to be mounted near the integrated circuit IC1. The input signal connector arrangement area 704 is an area where the input signal connector CN1 for general signal input can be mounted. A preferred example near the integrated circuit IC1 is a position close to the power supply pin and the ground pin of the integrated circuit IC1.

  In the input signal circuit arrangement area 703 and the input signal connector arrangement area 704, the general part shape display 709 indicates the shape of the general part. For example, the general component shape display 709 clearly indicates the outline of the integrated circuit IC1, the bypass capacitor C1, and the input signal connector CN1 by the outline display of silk printing.

  Further, in the input signal circuit disposition area 703 and the input signal connector disposition area 704, general component symbols are clearly indicated by a general component symbol display 710. For example, the general component symbol display 710 specifies the component symbol of the integrated circuit IC1, the bypass capacitor C1, and the input signal connector CN1 by silk-screen character display or numeric display.

  Next, a game control board on which components for the test are mounted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a test circuit arrangement area, a test connector arrangement area, an input signal circuit arrangement area, and an input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (component mounting during test) of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example.

  The game control board 700b has a component mounting state at the time of testing the test circuit disposition area 701, the test connector disposition area 702, the input signal circuit disposition area 703, and the input signal connector disposition area 704. Component mounting).

  The test circuit area 701 mounts the test IC 721 (integrated circuit IC2) and the capacitor 722 (bypass capacitor C2), and the test connector area 702 mounts the test connector 720 (test connector CN2). I do.

  Thus, the capacitor 722 functions as a bypass capacitor of the test IC 721, and reduces noise accompanying the operation of the test IC 721. Such a game control board 700b enables the test circuit to operate stably.

  The input signal circuit arrangement area 703 mounts the input signal IC 724 (integrated circuit IC1) and the capacitor 725 (bypass capacitor C1), and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 includes the input signal connector 723 (input signal The connector CN1) is mounted.

  Accordingly, the capacitor 725 functions as a bypass capacitor of the input signal IC 724, and reduces noise accompanying the operation of the input signal IC 724. Such a game control board 700b enables the input signal circuit to operate stably.

  Next, a game control board on which components during mass production are mounted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 shows a test circuit arrangement area, a test connector arrangement area, an input signal circuit arrangement area, and an input signal connector arrangement area of the game control board (components mounted in mass production) of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example.

  The game control board 700c has a component mounting state during mass production of the test circuit arrangement area 701, the test connector arrangement area 702, the input signal circuit arrangement area 703, and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 (during mass production). Component mounting).

  In the test circuit arrangement area 701, the capacitor 722 (bypass capacitor C2) is mounted, and the test IC 721 (integrated circuit IC2) is not mounted. Further, the test connector placement area 702 does not mount the test connector 720 (test connector CN2).

  Thereby, the game control board 700c physically prevents a third party from accessing the test signal. In addition, the game control board 700c reduces manufacturing costs during mass production by not mounting components that are not originally required for the intended use.

  The input signal circuit arrangement area 703 mounts the input signal IC 724 (integrated circuit IC1) and the capacitor 725 (bypass capacitor C1), and the input signal connector arrangement area 704 includes the input signal connector 723 (input signal The connector CN1) is mounted.

  Accordingly, the capacitor 725 functions as a bypass capacitor of the input signal IC 724, and reduces noise accompanying the operation of the input signal IC 724. Such a game control board 700c enables the input signal circuit to operate stably.

  Note that the capacitor 722 does not function as a bypass capacitor of the test IC 721, but is expected to function as a noise reduction component of the circuit pattern 711. For example, the capacitor 722 suppresses that the circuit pattern 711 on which the test IC 721 is not mounted becomes an antenna and becomes a noise source. Further, the capacitor 722 assists the function as a bypass capacitor of the capacitor 725.

  Here, auxiliary function of the capacitor 722 as a bypass capacitor of the capacitor 725 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating an example of a power supply pattern and a ground pattern in which the bypass capacitor according to the fifth embodiment is installed.

  The capacitor 722 and the capacitor 725 are mounted on a common power supply pattern 727 and a common ground pattern 726. At least one of the power supply pattern 727 and the ground pattern 726 is formed of an island-shaped conductor pattern on the component mounting surface or the solder surface of the game control board 700. For example, the power supply pattern 727 is an island-shaped conductor pattern on the solder surface of the game control board 700, and is electrically connected to a power supply pattern on the component mounting surface via a via (not shown). The ground pattern 726 is an island-shaped conductor pattern on the solder surface of the game control board 700, and is electrically connected to a ground pattern on the component mounting surface via a via (not shown).

  Such a power supply pattern 727 and a ground pattern 726 serve as an antenna when the test IC 721 is not mounted, and may serve as a noise source in an input signal circuit. However, the game control board 700 mounts the capacitor 722 on the power supply pattern 727 and the ground pattern 726 to reduce or suppress the power supply pattern 727 and the ground pattern 726 from becoming a noise source. In addition, the game control board 700 can support the function as a bypass capacitor of the capacitor 725 by the capacitor 722 by mounting the capacitor 722 in addition to the capacitor 725 on the power supply pattern 727 and the ground pattern 726.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can operate stably even if there is a non-mounting area where no electronic component is mounted on the board. Further, the gaming machine 10 can stably operate an input signal circuit that requires a more reliable signal input.

  Note that the capacitors 722 and 725 are examples of noise reduction components, and the noise reduction components may be configured by resistors, capacitors, coils, other passive elements, or a combination thereof.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fifth embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a first function (eg, a test signal output function, a non-test signal output function, etc.) related to connection with an external device (eg, a test device) by mounting a first integrated circuit (eg, a test IC 721). A first circuit (for example, a test circuit) that realizes a game use function and a non-mass production use function and a second integrated circuit (for example, an input signal IC 724) that implements a first circuit (for example, an input signal IC 724) that is not related to an external device. A board (for example, a game control board 700) including a second circuit (for example, an input signal circuit) for realizing two functions (for example, a signal input function, a game use function, and a mass production use function). The substrate includes a first region (for example, a test circuit disposition region 701) where the first integrated circuit can be mounted and not mounted, and a second region (for example, an input signal) where the second integrated circuit is mounted. Circuit arrangement area 703). The first circuit connects a first power supply line (for example, a conductor pattern connecting the power supply pin of the test IC 721 to the power supply) connecting the first integrated circuit to the power supply, and the first integrated circuit to the ground. A first ground line (for example, a conductor pattern connecting the ground pin of the test IC 721 to the ground) and a first noise reduction component (for example, a capacitor 722) for reducing noise of the first integrated circuit. The second circuit includes a second power supply line (for example, a conductor pattern connecting the power supply pin of the input signal IC 724 and the power supply) connecting the second integrated circuit and the power supply, and a second integrated circuit and the ground. A second ground line to be connected (for example, a conductor pattern for connecting the ground pin of the input signal IC 724 to the ground) and a second noise reduction component (for example, a capacitor 725) for reducing noise of the second integrated circuit are provided. Including. The first power supply line and the second power supply line share a first conductor pattern (for example, power supply pattern 727). The first ground line and the second ground line share a second conductor pattern (for example, ground pattern 726). The first noise reduction component and the second noise reduction component are mounted so as to bridge the first conductor pattern and the second conductor pattern (see FIGS. 87 and 88).

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the harness connected to the connector on the board is covered with a cable for the harness so that the harness connected to the board can be withdrawn and removed. Make sex difficult. Such a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment makes it difficult to perform an illegal act involving an operation of removing a harness from a board. With reference to FIG. 89, a description will be given of a board and a harness that make the removal workability difficult while the harness connected to the board can be removed. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a board and a harness according to the sixth embodiment.

  FIG. 89 (1) shows an overview of the substrate 733 and the harness 736 by side observation, and FIG. 89 (2) shows an overview of the substrate 733 and the harness 736 by front observation (upward observation). The substrate 733 is sandwiched between the upper substrate box 730 and the lower substrate box 732, and is accommodated in the upper substrate box 730 and the lower substrate box 732. The board 733 includes a board-side connector 734 connected to the harness 736 by a connector at an end of the component mounting surface. The board side connector 734 faces the outside of the board accommodating space from the opening 731 of the upper board box 730. The board side connector 734 is connected to the harness side connector 737 of the harness 736 by a connector. The harness connector 737 has a locking claw 739 and engages with a locking receiving portion 735 of the board connector 734. Further, the harness side connector 737 has an operation unit 738. The operation section 738 enables the engagement state with the lock receiving section 735 to be released. For example, the operating portion 738 can release the engagement state between the locking claw 739 and the locking receiving portion 735 by a pushing operation by the operator.

  The cable of the harness 736 is locked by the locking portion 729. The wiring direction of the harness 736 is restricted to the locking portion 729 side, and the harness 736 is drawn in a direction covering the operation portion 738. The cable covering the operation unit 738 not only reduces the operability of the operation unit 738, but also reduces the visibility of the operation unit 738.

  The amount of play of the cable in the height direction of the harness 736 is restricted so that the harness 736 does not exceed the height of the upper board box 730 due to routing by the locking portion 729. Accordingly, the harness 736 is restricted to a position where the height of the cable immediately above the operation unit 738 is lower than the height of the upper board box 730 by d1.

  The cable whose play in the height direction is restricted covers the operation unit 738 so as to further hinder the operation of the operation unit 738. The cable having a limited play amount and covering the operation unit 738 not only lowers the operability of the operation unit 738 but also further lowers the visibility of the operation unit 738.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the withdrawal workability difficult while making the harness 736 connected to the board 733 detachable. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform a difficult task, but improves deterrence against illegal acts. Note that the gaming machine 10 can provide a sufficient working environment for a legitimate worker by enabling the locking state of the cable by the locking portion 729 to be released. Even if the gaming machine 10 can release the locked state of the cable by the locking portion 729, the operation of releasing the locked state of the cable by the locking portion 729 is also forced on a fraudulent person, and deterrence against fraudulent acts is performed. Can hold power.

  Note that the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 is preferably larger than the width of the operation unit 738. In other words, it is desirable that the width of the operation unit 738 is smaller than the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736. In the gaming machine 10, the operation unit 738 can be suitably covered with the cable by aligning the center axis of the operation unit 738 with the center axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 and routing the cable.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 90, of the impediment to the removal workability of the harness connecting the two substrates arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a harness that connects the two substrates and the two substrates arranged in the horizontal direction according to the sixth embodiment.

  The harness 736 includes a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness side connector 737 is connected to a board side connector (not shown) of the board 733 by a connector. The harness-side connector 739 is connected to a board-side connector (not shown) of the board 741 by a connector. Thus, the harness 736 connects the two substrates 733 and 741 arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

  The board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 741 are opposed in the lateral direction. Therefore, the harness 736 is suspended in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) between the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 741. In the harness 736, the direction in which the cable is routed from both the boards 733 and 741 is regulated, and the operation unit 738 of the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 of the harness-side connector 739 are covered with the cable.

  At this time, the board 733 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 739, and the substrate 741 is a locking portion that regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 737. As a function.

  In the gaming machine 10, the board-side connector provided on the board 733 and the board-side connector provided on the board 741 are laterally opposed, and the center axes of the operation units 738 and 740 and the center axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 are aligned. By pulling the cable around, the operation units 738 and 740 can be suitably covered with the cable. Since the harness 736 is suspended in the horizontal direction, the operation units 738 and 740 can be covered with the cables to the same extent.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the removal workability difficult while making the harness 736 connected to the substrates 733 and 741 detachable. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform a difficult task, but improves deterrence against illegal acts.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 91, of impediment to the removal workability of the harness that connects the two substrates arranged in the vertical direction. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a harness that connects the two substrates and the two substrates arranged in the vertical direction according to the sixth embodiment.

  The harness 736 includes a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness side connector 737 is connected to a board side connector (not shown) of the board 733 by a connector. The harness-side connector 739 is connected to a board-side connector (not shown) of the board 742 by a connector. Thus, the harness 736 connects the two substrates 733 and 742 arranged in the vertical direction.

  The board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 742 are opposed in the vertical direction. Therefore, the harness 736 is suspended in the vertical direction (vertical direction) between the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 742. In the harness 736, the direction in which the cable is routed from both the boards 733 and 742 is regulated, and the operation unit 738 of the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 of the harness-side connector 739 are covered with the cable.

  At this time, the board 733 has a function as a locking portion that regulates a direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 739, and the substrate 742 is a locking portion that regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 737. As a function. In the harness 736, the direction of the cable from the harness-side connector 737 is more strongly regulated by its own weight than the direction of the cable from the harness-side connector 739.

  In the gaming machine 10, the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 742 are vertically opposed, and the center axes of the operation units 738 and 740 and the center axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 are aligned. By pulling the cable around, the operation units 738 and 740 can be suitably covered with the cable. In addition, since the harness 736 is suspended in the vertical direction, it is possible to cover the operation unit 738 with a cable by making the removal workability more difficult than that of the operation unit 740.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the removal workability difficult while making the harness 736 connected to the substrates 733 and 742 detachable. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform a difficult task, but improves deterrence against illegal acts.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 92, of the impediment to the removal workability of the harness that connects two boards having different connector orientations and not facing each other. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of two boards of the sixth embodiment in which the orientations of the connectors are different and the connectors do not face each other, and a harness connecting the two boards.

  The harness 736 includes a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness side connector 737 is connected to a board side connector (not shown) of the board 733 by a connector. The harness side connector 739 is connected to a board side connector (not shown) of the board 743 by a connector. As a result, the harness 736 connects the two substrates 733 and 743 that are arranged to be shifted both in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction (different direction offset arrangement).

  The board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 743 face different directions and do not face each other. That is, the directions of the central axis of the operation unit 738 and the central axis of the operation unit 740 are different by the angle A. Therefore, when the harness 736 is directly suspended between the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 743, the direction in which the cable is routed from both the boards 733 and 743 is regulated, and the harness-side connector The operation unit 738 included in the 737 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness side connector 739 cannot be suitably covered with the cable.

  Therefore, when the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 743 face in different directions and do not face each other, the gaming machine 10 pulls the harness 736 by the locking pieces 744 and 745 instead of the boards 733 and 743. Regulate direction. Thus, the harness 736 restricts the direction in which the cable is routed from both the locking pieces 744 and 745, and covers the operation unit 738 of the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 of the harness-side connector 739 with the cable.

  At this time, the locking piece 744 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 737, and the locking piece 745 regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 739. It has a function as a locking portion.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 is preferably configured such that the board-side connector of the board 733 and the locking piece 744 are opposed to each other, and the cables are routed by aligning both central axes with the central axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736. The operation unit 738 can be covered with a cable. In addition, the gaming machine 10 preferably operates the board-side connector of the board 743 by opposing the locking piece 745 and aligning the center axes of both with the center axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to route the cable. The part 740 can be covered with a cable.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the withdrawal workability difficult while making the harness 736 connected to the substrates 733 and 743 detachable. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform a difficult task, but improves deterrence against illegal acts.

  Note that the locking piece 744 locks the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the opposing board side connector and the width of the operation unit 738. In other words, the locking piece 744 narrows the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the opposing board-side connector to be narrower than the width of the operation unit 738 and does not lock. Similarly, the locking piece 745 locks the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the opposing board side connector and the width of the operation unit 740. In other words, the locking piece 745 narrows the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the opposing board-side connector to be narrower than the width of the operation unit 740 and does not lock.

  In addition, the locking pieces 744 and 745 can hold the cable bundle of the harness 736 such that the width of the cable bundle is smaller than the width of the operation units 738 and 740 between both. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can compactly route the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the locking pieces 744 and 745.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of the impediment to the removal workability of the harness that connects two boards that have the same connector orientation but have a large offset and do not face each other. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of two boards in which the connector orientations of the sixth embodiment are the same but have a large offset and the connectors do not face each other, and a harness connecting the two boards.

  The harness 736 includes a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness side connector 737 is connected to a board side connector (not shown) of the board 733 by a connector. The harness side connector 739 is connected to a board side connector (not shown) of the board 746 by a connector. As a result, the harness 736 connects the two substrates 733 and 746 which are arranged with a large offset (the same direction offset arrangement) although the directions of the connectors match. Here, the large offset means that when the harness 736 is directly suspended between both the board-side connectors, the direction in which the cable is routed from both the board-side connectors is regulated, and the operating section of the harness-side connector 737 is provided. The offset (deviation amount) d2 is such that the cable 738 and the operation unit 740 of the harness side connector 739 cannot be suitably covered with the cable.

  That is, when the harness 736 is directly suspended between the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 746, the direction in which the cable is routed from both the boards 733 and 746 is regulated, and the harness-side connector The operation unit 738 included in the 737 and the operation unit 740 included in the harness side connector 739 cannot be suitably covered with the cable.

  Therefore, when the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 746 have a large offset, the gaming machine 10 regulates the wiring direction of the harness 736 by locking pieces 747 and 748 instead of the boards 733 and 746. I do. Thus, the harness 736 restricts the direction in which the cable is routed from both the locking pieces 747 and 748, and covers the operation unit 738 of the harness connector 737 and the operation unit 740 of the harness connector 739 with the cable.

  At this time, the locking piece 747 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 737, and the locking piece 748 regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 739. It has a function as a locking portion.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 is preferably configured such that the board-side connector of the board 733 and the locking piece 747 are opposed to each other, and the cables are routed by aligning the central axes of both with the central axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736. The operation unit 738 can be covered with a cable. In addition, the gaming machine 10 preferably operates the board-side connector of the board 746 by opposing the locking piece 748, and aligning the center axes of both with the center axis of the cable bundle of the harness 736 to route the cable. The part 740 can be covered with a cable.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make withdrawal workability difficult while making the harness 736 connected to the substrates 733 and 746 detachable. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform a difficult task, but improves deterrence against illegal acts.

  The locking piece 747 locks the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the opposing board-side connector and the width of the operation unit 738. In other words, the locking piece 747 narrows the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the opposing board-side connector to be narrower than the width of the operation unit 738 and does not lock. Similarly, the locking piece 748 locks the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the opposing board-side connector and the width of the operation unit 740. In other words, the locking piece 748 narrows the width of the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the opposing board side connector to be narrower than the width of the operation unit 740 and does not lock.

  In addition, the locking pieces 747 and 748 can hold the cable bundle of the harness 736 such that the width of the cable bundle is smaller than the width of the operation units 738 and 740 between them. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can compactly route the cable bundle of the harness 736 between the locking pieces 747 and 748.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a description will be given of impediment to the removal workability of the harness that connects the two boards, in which the orientation of the connector matches, but only a part of the connector faces due to the offset. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of two boards in which the directions of the connectors of the sixth embodiment match but only a part of the connectors face each other due to an offset, and a harness connecting the two boards.

  The harness 736 includes a harness-side connector 737 at one end and a harness-side connector 739 at the other end. The harness side connector 737 is connected to a board side connector (not shown) of the board 733 by a connector. The harness side connector 739 is connected to a board side connector (not shown) of the board 747 by a connector. As a result, the harness 736 connects the two substrates 733 and 747 in which the connector orientations match but only a part of the connector faces each other due to the offset (the same direction offset arrangement). Note that the offset in which only a part of the connector faces here is such that when the harness 736 is directly suspended between the two connectors on the board side, the direction in which the cable is routed from both the board side connectors is regulated, and the harness The offset (shift amount) d3 is such that the operation section 738 of the side connector 737 and the operation section 740 of the harness side connector 739 can be preferably covered with a cable.

  The board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 747 are partially opposed in the vertical direction. Therefore, the harness 736 is suspended obliquely in the vertical direction between the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 747. In the harness 736, the direction in which the cable is routed from both the boards 733 and 747 is regulated, and the operation unit 738 of the harness-side connector 737 and the operation unit 740 of the harness-side connector 739 are covered with the cable.

  At this time, the board 733 has a function as a locking portion that regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 739, and the substrate 747 is a locking portion that regulates the direction in which the cable is routed from the harness side connector 737. As a function.

  In this way, even if the gaming machine 10 has an offset between the board-side connector of the board 733 and the board-side connector of the board 747 and only partially faces in the vertical direction, as long as the offset is small, Can suitably cover the operation units 738 and 740 with a cable.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the removal workability difficult while making the harness 736 connected to the substrates 733 and 747 detachable. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform a difficult task, but improves deterrence against illegal acts.

  Next, a first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The locking portion 729 of the sixth embodiment restricts the height of the cable immediately above the operation portion 738 to a position lower than the height of the upper board box 730 by d1. The lock of Example 1 is more preferably constrained. FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a modification 1 of the sixth embodiment, which is obtained by laterally observing a board and a harness. In addition, about the structure similar to 6th Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The cable of the harness 736 is locked by the locking pieces 748. The locking piece 748 locks the cable of the harness 736 below the component mounting surface, more preferably below the bottom surface of the board box. The component mounting surface is the component mounting surface of the board 733 and the mounting surface of the board connector 734 to which the harness connector 737 is connected. The bottom surface of the substrate box is the lower surface of the lower substrate box 732.

  As a result, the wiring direction of the harness 736 is restricted to the locking piece 748 side, and the harness 736 is drawn in a direction covering the operation portion 738. The cable covering the operation unit 738 not only reduces the operability of the operation unit 738, but also reduces the visibility of the operation unit 738.

  The play amount of the cable in the height direction of the harness 736 is strongly restricted so as not to exceed the height of the upper board box 730 due to the routing by the locking pieces 748. Accordingly, the harness 736 is restricted to a position where the height of the cable immediately above the operation unit 738 is lower than the height of the upper board box 730 by d1. The locking piece 748 may lock the cable of the harness 736 such that the cable of the harness 736 comes into contact with the side wall 732a of the board box.

  The cable whose play in the height direction is restricted covers the operation unit 738 so as to further hinder the operation of the operation unit 738. The cable having a limited play amount and covering the operation unit 738 not only lowers the operability of the operation unit 738 but also further lowers the visibility of the operation unit 738.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the withdrawal workability difficult while making the harness 736 connected to the board 733 detachable. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform a difficult task, but improves deterrence against illegal acts. Note that the gaming machine 10 can provide a sufficient working environment to a legitimate worker by enabling the locking state of the cable by the locking piece 748 to be released. Even if the gaming machine 10 can release the locked state of the cable by the locking portion 729, the operation of releasing the locked state of the cable by the locking piece 748 is also forced on a fraudulent person, and deterrence against fraudulent acts is performed. Can hold power.

  Next, a second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Although the cable of the sixth embodiment is restricted by the locking pieces and the board, the locking portion of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment restricts the cable without using the locking pieces and the board. FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a variation 2 of the sixth embodiment obtained by observing the board and the harness from the side. In addition, about the structure similar to 6th Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The upper substrate box 730 and the lower substrate box 732 are attached to the attachment base 749. The mounting base 749 has a plate shape that is at least one size larger than the lower board box 732, and the mounting base side wall 749a protrudes from the board box side wall 732a. The wiring direction of the harness 736 is regulated by the mounting base side wall 749a.

  That is, the cable of the harness 736 is routed from the harness side connector 737 to the mounting base side wall 749a, and then is routed from the mounting base side wall 749a in a direction turned back. In this way, the mounting base side wall 749a routes the cable of the harness 736 below the bottom surface of the board box.

  Thus, the wiring direction of the harness 736 is restricted by the mounting base side wall 749a, and the harness 736 is drawn in a direction covering the operation unit 738. The cable covering the operation unit 738 not only reduces the operability of the operation unit 738, but also reduces the visibility of the operation unit 738.

  Note that the amount of play of the cable in the height direction of the harness 736 is strongly restricted so as not to exceed the height of the upper board box 730 by routing through the mounting base side wall 749a. Accordingly, the harness 736 is restricted to a position where the height of the cable immediately above the operation unit 738 is lower than the height of the upper board box 730 by d1. Note that the mounting base side wall 749a may lock the cable of the harness 736 so that the cable of the harness 736 contacts the board box side wall 732a.

  The cable whose play in the height direction is restricted covers the operation unit 738 so as to further hinder the operation of the operation unit 738. The cable having a limited play amount and covering the operation unit 738 not only lowers the operability of the operation unit 738 but also further lowers the visibility of the operation unit 738.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the withdrawal workability difficult while making the harness 736 connected to the board 733 detachable. Such a gaming machine 10 forces a legitimate worker to perform a difficult task, but improves deterrence against illegal acts.

  Note that the wiring direction of the harness 736 is regulated by the mounting base side wall 749a, but may be replaced with the mounting base 749 as long as it is a structural material that supports the substrate 733. For example, the wiring direction of the harness 736 may be restricted by the lower board box 732.

  Such a structural material is generally sufficiently larger than the operation unit 738, so that the relationship between the end of the structural material and the operation unit 738 can be easily configured. Therefore, the operation unit 738 can be easily covered with the cable bundle. Further, even if there are two or more harnesses connected to the substrate 733, it is not necessary to prepare a locking portion for each harness.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described sixth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a board (for example, the board 733), a harness (for example, the harness 736) for connecting the board to the connector, and a locking section (for example, the locking section 729) for locking the harness outside the board. ). The board is provided with a board-side connector (for example, board-side connector 734) such that a withdrawal operation section (for example, operation section 738) of the harness-side connector (for example, harness-side connector 737) faces the outer edge of the board when the connector is connected. Set up. The harness covers the pull-out operation section when locked by the locking section (see FIG. 89).

  (2) The gaming machine 10 includes a board (for example, the board 733), a harness (for example, a harness 736) for connecting the board to the connector, and a structural material (for example, the mounting base 749) for supporting the board. The board is provided with a board-side connector (for example, board-side connector 734) such that a withdrawal operation section (for example, operation section 738) of the harness-side connector (for example, harness-side connector 737) faces the outer edge of the structural material when the connector is connected. Set up. The harness covers the pull-out operation section when the drawing direction is regulated by the structural material (see FIG. 96).

[Seventh Embodiment]
The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has an external information terminal plate in which an operation unit is displayed by silk printing, instead of the external information terminal plate 71 of the first embodiment. First, an overview of the external information terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of an external information terminal board according to the seventh embodiment.

  The external information terminal board 750 includes an external information terminal board 751, a connector 752, an information output terminal 753, and a photocoupler 758. The external information terminal board 751 mounts the connector 752, the information output terminal 753, and the photocoupler 758 on the component mounting surface. The external information terminal plate 750 includes one connector 752 (T1). The external information terminal plate 750 is connected to the game control device 100 via a harness connected to the connector 752.

  The information output terminal 753 is a terminal that can output information to an external device such as a hall computer. The external information terminal plate 750 includes ten information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10) in one row. The five information output terminals 753 of CN1 to CN5 and the five information output terminals 753 of CN6 to CN10 are arranged on the external information terminal board 751 at equal intervals. The arrangement interval between the information output terminal 753 of CN5 and the information output terminal 753 of CN6 is set wider than the arrangement interval between the other information output terminals 753. The gap between the information output terminal 753 of CN5 and the information output terminal 753 of CN6 can be used as a guide for confirming the positions of the ten information output terminals 753. The ten information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10) are easily identified by being assigned different colors, but may be assigned the same color for cost reduction. .

  The information output terminal 753 is connectable to a one-to-two electric wire. The information output terminal 753 includes electric wire connection portions 756 and 757, and each of them can connect a single electric wire. The wire connection portions 756 and 757 have openings into which wires can be inserted. The opening of each of the wire connection parts 756 and 757 is normally closed by a lid urged by an urging part (for example, a spring) not shown. By pressing the short operation lever 754, the lid of the wire connection portion 756 is moved against the urging by the urging portion, and the opening is switched from the closed state to the open state. When the pressing operation of the short operation lever 754 is stopped, the short connection lever 754 returns to the initial position by the urging of the urging unit, and the lid is moved to close the opening from the open state. Can be switched to a state. When the long operation lever 755 is pressed, the lid of the wire connection portion 757 is moved against the urging by the urging portion, and the opening is switched from the closed state to the open state. When the pressing operation of the long operation lever 755 is stopped, the wire connection portion 757 returns to the initial position by the urging of the urging portion, and the lid is moved to open the opening. Is switched to the closed state.

  The photocoupler 758 is one of the isolation units that output information while electrically insulating from an external device such as a hall computer. Therefore, the external information terminal plate 750 may use a contactless relay such as a phototransistor or a contact relay such as a mechanical relay instead of the photocoupler 758. In that case, the external information terminal plate 750 can include a passive element such as a resistor or a capacitor in the configuration of the isolation means.

  The external information terminal plate 750 includes ten photocouplers 758 (PC1 to PC10) in one row. The five photocouplers 758 from PC1 to PC5 and the five photocouplers 758 from PC6 to PC10 are arranged on the external information terminal board 751 at equal intervals. The arrangement interval between the photocoupler 758 of the PC5 and the photocoupler 758 of the PC6 is set wider than the arrangement interval of the other photocouplers 758. The gap between the photocoupler 758 of the PC5 and the photocoupler 758 of the PC6 can be used as a guide for confirming the positions of the ten photocouplers 758. Note that the photocouplers 758 each include a first terminal symbol 759 that specifies the position of the first terminal. The first terminal symbol 759 is indicated by, for example, a circle.

  The photocoupler 758 is provided in a pair with the information output terminal 753, and is arranged side by side on the side of the information output terminal 753 opposite to the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755). For example, the photocoupler 758a (PC10) is located between the operation shaft 754b of the short operation lever 754a of the information output terminal 753a (CN10) and the operation shaft 755b of the long operation lever 755a of the information output terminal 753a. (Short operation lever 754a, long operation lever 755a).

Next, an overview of the external information terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of an external information terminal board according to the seventh embodiment.
The external information terminal board 751 shown in FIG. 98 shows a state where components such as the connector 752, the information output terminal 753, and the photocoupler 758 are not mounted. The external information terminal board 751 includes a component shape display 760, a component symbol display 761, an operation unit display 762, and an identification auxiliary display 763 by silk display on the component mounting surface. The external information terminal board 751 displays a component shape display 760, a component symbol display 761, an operation unit display 762, and an identification auxiliary display 763 in a mode other than the silk display (for example, a conductor pattern display). Is also good.

  The component shape display 760 is a display that indicates the mounting position of the component by the approximate shape of the component. For example, the component shape display 760 indicates the mounting position of components such as the connector 752, the information output terminal 753, and the photocoupler 758 by a rectangle.

  The part symbol display 761 is a display of a symbol capable of uniquely specifying a part. For example, “CN1”, which is one of the component symbol displays 761, indicates that the mounted component is the information output terminal 753, and “PC1”, which is one of the component symbol displays 761, is that the mounted component is a photocoupler 758. "T1", which is one of the component symbol displays 761, indicates that the mounted component is the connector 752.

  The operation unit display 762 displays the outline of the operation units (short operation lever 754 and long operation lever 755) of the information output terminal 753. The operation unit display 762 includes a short rectangular display and a long rectangular display. The short rectangular display indicates the schematic shape and operation position of the short operation lever 754, and the long rectangular display indicates the schematic shape and operation position of the long operation lever 755.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform operation guidance by the operation unit display 762. Such a gaming machine 10 provides a suitable operation environment of the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755) in the external information terminal plate 750.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can compare the operation units (short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755) and the operation unit display 762, and can easily detect an abnormality when the operation unit is broken or the like. .

  The identification assisting display 763 specifies different colors assigned to the ten information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10) by character information. For example, the character information “white” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored white. The character information “midori” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored green. The character information “high” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored gray. The character information “Kiro” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored yellow. The character information “black” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored black. The character information “pink” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored pink. The character information “blue” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored blue. The character information “red” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored red. The character information “die” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored orange. The character information “Miz” indicates that the corresponding information output terminal 753 is colored light blue.

  The component shape display 760 is displayed so as not to be easily recognized by mounting components, but the component symbol display 761, the operation unit display 762, and the identification auxiliary display 763 are also easily displayed by mounting components.

  Next, an operation state of the information output terminal 753 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation state of the external information terminal according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 99 (1) shows a locked state of the information output terminal 753.

  The information output terminal 753 locks the state where the openings of the electric wire connection portions 756 and 757 are closed. At this time, the operation units (short operation lever 754 and long operation lever 755) are at the initial position, and are biased by the urging unit to maintain the initial position.

  The short operation lever 754 extends from the main body of the information output terminal 753 in a horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the drawing) by a distance d1 and has a gap by a height h1 between the information output terminal 753 and the component mounting surface of the external information terminal board 751. The long operation lever 755 extends horizontally from the main body of the information output terminal 753 by a distance d2 larger than the distance d1, and has a gap between the main body of the information output terminal 753 and the component mounting surface of the external information terminal board 751 by a height h2 lower than the height h1. Having.

  FIG. 99 (2) shows the released state of the information output terminal 753. The information output terminal 753 sets a state where the openings of the electric wire connection portions 756 and 757 are opened to a release state. At this time, the operation units (the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755) are at positions where the operator has pressed down against the urging of the urging unit, and the released state is held by the pressing operation.

  The short operation lever 754 is rotated about a fulcrum (not shown) as a rotation axis by a pressing operation, and has a gap between the component mounting surface of the external information terminal board 751 and a height h3 lower than the height h1. . The long operation lever 755 is rotated about a fulcrum (not shown) as a rotation axis by a pressing operation, and has a height h2 between the component mounting surface of the external information terminal board 751 and a height lower than the height h3. There is a gap by h4.

  As described above, the information output terminal 753 is operated by the operator because the operation positions of the operation units (short operation lever 754 and long operation lever 755) differ not only in the horizontal direction but also in the height direction. The operation unit can be easily recognized.

  In the external information terminal plate 750, the short operation levers 754 and the long operation levers 755 are alternately arranged in all the information output terminals 753, so that not only one information output terminal 753 but all the information output terminals 753 are provided. At 753, the operator can easily recognize the operation unit to be operated.

  Next, a modification of the arrangement of components in the external information terminal board 750 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 to 102. FIG. 100 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an arrangement example of the external information terminals and other components according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 101 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an arrangement example of the external information terminals and other components according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of a photocoupler and a resistor according to Modification Example 1 of the seventh embodiment.

  In the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 100 (1), a resistor 765 is arranged on the operation unit side. The resistor 765 is one of the passive elements included in the isolation unit. The resistor 765 is disposed at a position on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754 and not on the axis of the operation shaft 755L of the long operation lever 755. From another viewpoint, the resistor 765 is disposed outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operation lever 754. However, the resistor 765 may be disposed inside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755. Thus, in the external information terminal plate 750 according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the information output terminals 753 and the resistors 765 can be arranged at a high density without affecting operability. Therefore, the external information terminal plate 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can be formed more compact. The arrangement of the resistor 765 with respect to the information output terminal 753 indicates which side of the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755 is located with respect to the information output terminal 753. In addition, the placement of the resistor 765 with respect to the information output terminal 753 secures approximately the same space below each of the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755, so that the workability of inspection and confirmation of the external information terminal plate 750 is improved. Does not impair.

  An information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 100 (2) has a photocoupler 766 disposed on the operation unit side. The photocoupler 766 is one of the relay elements included in the isolation unit. The photocoupler 766 is disposed at a position on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754 and not on the axis of the operation shaft 755L of the long operation lever 755. Further, from another viewpoint, the photocoupler 766 is disposed outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operation lever 754. However, the photocoupler 766 may be disposed inside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755. Thus, in the external information terminal plate 750 according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the information output terminals 753 and the photocouplers 766 can be arranged at a high density without affecting the operability. Therefore, the external information terminal plate 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can be formed more compact. Further, the arrangement of the photocoupler 766 with respect to the information output terminal 753 indicates which side of the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755 is located with respect to the information output terminal 753. In addition, the placement of the photocoupler 766 with respect to the information output terminal 753 secures the same space below each of the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755, so that the external information terminal plate 750 can be inspected and checked. Does not impair the performance.

  Note that the resistor 765 shown in FIG. 100 (1) and the photocoupler 766 shown in FIG. 100 (2) are different from the photocoupler 766 shown in FIG. L1 and the horizontal operation line L2 of the long operation lever 755 may be arranged outside of both. Accordingly, the external information terminal plate 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment has the operation units (the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755) while the information output terminals 753 and the photocouplers 766 are arranged at high density. Ensure sufficient operability.

  An information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101A has a resistor 765 and a photocoupler 766 arranged on the operation unit side. The photocoupler 766 is disposed at a position on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754 and not on the axis of the operation shaft 755L of the long operation lever 755. Further, from another viewpoint, the photocoupler 766 is disposed outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operation lever 754. However, the photocoupler 766 may be disposed inside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755. The resistor 765 is disposed at a position on the axis of the operation shaft 755L of the long operation lever 755, but not on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754. From another viewpoint, the resistor 765 is disposed outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operation lever 754. However, the resistor 765 may be disposed inside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755.

  Note that the photocoupler 766 has a component that is taller than the resistor 765. In other words, the resistor 765 has a shorter component than the photocoupler 766. Therefore, as long as the height of the component is lower than the height h4 (see FIG. 99), the resistor 765 does not interfere with either the short operation lever 754 or the long operation lever 755. In addition, the photocoupler 766 does not interfere with the short operation lever 754 as long as the height of the component is lower than the height h3 (see FIG. 99).

  Thus, in the external information terminal plate 750 according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the information output terminal 753, the photocoupler 766, and the resistor 765 can be arranged at a high density without affecting the operability. The photocoupler 766 and the resistor 765 are examples of mounting components having different heights, and may be a combination of other mounting components. In addition, the arrangement of the photocoupler 766 and the resistor 765 with respect to the information output terminal 753 secures approximately the same space below each of the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755. Confirmation workability is not impaired.

  In the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101 (1), the mounted components are located on the respective axes of the operation shaft 754L and the operation shaft 755L, but the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. The mounted component is located on the axis. The resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766 are arranged at a position on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754 and not on the axis of the operation shaft 755L of the long operation lever 755. In another aspect, the resistor 765 is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operation lever 754, and the photocoupler 766 is arranged outside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755. . Thus, in the external information terminal plate 750 according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the information output terminal 753, the resistor 765, and the photocoupler 766 can be arranged at a high density without affecting the operability. Therefore, the external information terminal plate 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment can be formed more compact. Further, the arrangement of the resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766 with respect to the information output terminal 753 indicates which side the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755 are located with respect to the information output terminal 753. In addition, the arrangement of the photocoupler 766 and the resistor 765 with respect to the information output terminal 753 secures approximately the same space below each of the short operation lever 754 and the long operation lever 755. Confirmation workability is not impaired.

  An information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2) has a resistor 765 disposed outside the horizontal interference line L1 of the short operation lever 754, and a photocoupler outside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755. Although the information output terminal 753 shown in FIG. 101 (3) is arranged, both the resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766 are arranged outside the horizontal interference line L2 of the long operation lever 755. As a result, the external information terminal plate 750 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment is configured such that the information output terminal 753, the resistor 765, and the photocoupler 766 are arranged at a high density while the operation unit (short operation lever 754, long operation The lever 755) ensures sufficient operability.

  When the resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766 are arranged on the axis of the operation shaft 754L of the short operation lever 754, the external information terminal plate 750 is replaced by the photocoupler that is a tall component. It is desirable to arrange on the information output terminal 753 side from 766 from the viewpoint of operability.

  When a component paired with the information output terminal 753 is arranged on the operation unit side of the information output terminal 753, the external information terminal board 750 displays the operation unit display 762 between the component paired with the information output terminal 753. indicate. At this time, the operation unit display 762 functions as a correspondence display that clearly indicates the correspondence between the information output terminal 753 and the component paired with the information output terminal 753.

  102 (1) and 102 (2) are arranged such that the first color band 543 faces the first terminal 767 side of the photocoupler 766. Since the first terminal 767 of the photocoupler 766 is specified by the first terminal symbol 759, the resistor 765 is arranged such that the first color band 543 faces the first terminal symbol 759 of the photocoupler 766. , Can be rephrased.

  Note that the resistor 765 is a passive element whose rating is indicated by a color code, and has a required number of color bands. For example, the resistor 765 has four color bands, a first number indicated by the first color band 543, a second number indicated by the second color band, a multiplier indicated by the third color band, and a fourth color band. And the nominal resistance tolerance indicated by. Therefore, the resistance 765 facilitates the confirmation of the first color band 543, so that the resistance 765 can be more easily confirmed. Note that the resistor 765 displays the first color band 543 on the side where the color band interval is narrow, and displays the fourth color band on the side where the color band interval is wide.

Such an arrangement of the resistor 765 makes it easy to find an incorrect arrangement of the resistor 765 and the photocoupler 766.
Note that the resistor 765 is an example of a passive element that displays a rating using a color code, and can be applied to other passive elements included in the isolation unit as long as the passive element displays a rating using a color code. Further, the photocoupler 766 is an example of a relay element in which the first terminal is specified by the first terminal symbol. If the relay element has the first terminal specified by the first terminal symbol, the photocoupler 766 is included in the isolation unit. It can be applied to other relay elements.

  Next, an external information terminal plate according to a second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of an external information terminal plate according to Modification Example 2 of the seventh embodiment.

  The external information terminal board 770 includes an external information terminal board 771, a connector 752, an information output terminal 753, and a photocoupler 758. The external information terminal board 771 mounts the connector 752, the information output terminal 753, and the photocoupler 758 on the component mounting surface. The external information terminal plate 770 includes one connector 752 (T1). The external information terminal plate 770 is connected to the game control device 100 via a harness connected to the connector 752.

  The information output terminal 753 is a terminal that can output information to an external device such as a hall computer. The external information terminal plate 770 includes ten information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10) in one row. The five information output terminals 753 of CN1 to CN5 and the five information output terminals 753 of CN6 to CN10 are arranged on the external information terminal board 771 at equal intervals. The arrangement interval between the information output terminal 753 of CN5 and the information output terminal 753 of CN6 is set wider than the arrangement interval between the other information output terminals 753. The gap between the information output terminal 753 of CN5 and the information output terminal 753 of CN6 can be used as a guide for confirming the positions of the ten information output terminals 753. Note that the ten information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10) are easily distinguished by being given different colors.

  The external information terminal plate 770 includes ten photocouplers 758 (PC1 to PC10) in one row. The ten photocouplers 758 of PC1 to PC10 are respectively arranged on the external information terminal board 771 at equal intervals. However, the ten photocouplers 758 are arranged more densely than the ten information output terminals 753.

  Thus, the external information terminal board 771 can be configured to be more compact than the external information terminal board 751 by an amount corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing. Although the external information terminal board 771 has the ten photocouplers 758 arranged collectively, other passive elements constituting the isolation means may be arranged collectively. The ten information output terminals 753 are desirably arranged in the same manner as the external information terminal board 751 from the viewpoint of ensuring the operability, but are arranged in a concentrated manner in the same manner as the photocoupler 758. Is also good. When the external information terminal board 771 becomes non-rectangular due to an area (corresponding to a hatched portion in the drawing) that becomes unnecessary due to aggregation, it is desirable that the area that becomes unnecessary due to aggregation be located far from the connector 752. The external information terminal plate 770 configured compactly increases the degree of freedom in arrangement in the gaming machine 10.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes an external information terminal plate (for example, an external information terminal plate 750) that can output information to an external device (for example, a hall computer). The external information terminal plate has an information output terminal (for example, information output terminal 753) to which a wire can be connected by operating a lever portion (for example, short operation lever 754, long operation lever 755), and an information output terminal. A substrate (for example, an external information terminal substrate 751). The board sets the position of the information output terminal (for example, component shape display 760) and the operation position of the lever unit (for example, the operation unit display 762) in the display contents of the arrangement surface on which the information output terminal is disposed. (See FIGS. 97 and 98).

  (2) The external information terminal plate of (1) includes two or more information output terminals (for example, information output terminals 753 (CN1 to CN10)) and isolation means (for example, for insulating the external device and the gaming machine). A photocoupler 766) is provided for each information output terminal. The board has a pair of information output terminals and isolation means arranged side by side on an operation shaft (for example, operation shaft 754L) of a lever portion of the information output terminal (see FIG. 100 (2)).

  (3) The external information terminal board of (1) includes an information output terminal and isolation means (for example, an information output terminal 753) that insulates the external device from the gaming machine. The information output terminal is capable of connecting a first wire of a one-to-two wire by operating a first lever portion (for example, a long operation lever 755), and connecting a second wire to the second lever portion. (For example, the connection can be made by operating the short operation lever 754). The movable range of the first lever portion is non-interfering with the first height (for example, height h4) from the mounting surface, and the movable range of the second lever portion is the first height from the mounting surface. Is non-interfering by a second height (eg, height h3) that is greater than The substrate is provided with isolation means closer to the second lever portion than the first lever portion (see FIG. 100 (2)).

  (4) The external information terminal board of (1) is provided with an information output terminal and isolation means for insulating the external device from the gaming machine. The isolation means includes a relay element (for example, a photocoupler 766) and a passive element (for example, a resistor 765) whose rating is indicated by a color code. The substrate arranges the passive element and the relay element side by side with the first color band of the color code of the passive element facing the first terminal of the relay element (see FIG. 102).

  (5) The external information terminal board of (1) (for example, the external information terminal board 770) includes an information output terminal and an isolation unit that insulates the external device from the gaming machine. The isolation unit includes an isolation unit constituent element (for example, a relay element such as a photocoupler 766 or a passive element such as a resistor 765). The board collects the components of the isolation means as compared with the arrangement of the information output terminals (see FIG. 103).

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment improves workability in a gaming machine installation environment by using irradiation light from a backlight of a liquid crystal display device. First, an arrangement environment of the liquid crystal display device in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 104 shows a state in which the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame (main frame) 11. In the gaming machine 10, the outer frame 11 is fixed to a game arcade facility generally called an island, and the front frame 12 is opened to allow a staff member to perform maintenance work. For this reason, the gaming machine 10 is excellent in maintenance workability in an installation environment on the open side of the outer frame 11 on the open side of the outer frame 11 that supports the front frame 12. Particularly, in recent gaming machines, the front frame 12 (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21) has a large projecting amount, so that the front frame 12 is connected to a game hall facility (for example, a calling lamp). Or the card unit, etc.), and the opening amount of the front frame 12 may be limited. In addition, the outer frame 11 allows the front frame 12 to be opened and closed using the left side as a rotation axis, but the outer frame 11 may be capable of opening and closing the front frame 12 using the right side as a rotation axis.

  The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 on the back side of the game board 30. The game control device 100 includes a game control board 510 that is housed in a board box with the connector connection portion facing. The effect control device 300 includes an effect control board 511 that is housed in a board box with the connector connecting part facing the front. Further, the front frame 12 includes various substrates 512, 513, and 514 facing the back side from the front frame 12. The various boards 512, 513, and 514 are a control board (for example, a payout control board), a relay board (for example, the relay board 70), and other boards (for example, an LED board or a sensor board). Further, the front frame 12 supports the game control board 510, the effect control board 511, and the various boards 512, 513, and 514 by making the component mounting surface visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

  The gaming machine 10 electrically connects the game control board 510, the effect control board 511, and the various boards 512, 513, and 514 by a harness. At this time, the harness functions as a signal line for transmitting and receiving signals between the boards or a power line for transmitting power between the boards.

  The front frame 12 includes various substrates and a harness (not shown) connected to the substrates facing the rear surface. The front frame 12 may have a substrate or a harness facing the back side through a protective cover (not shown).

  The gaming machine 10 includes a liquid crystal display device 780 having a display unit facing the front side. The liquid crystal display device 780 includes an opening facing the display unit on the front side, and a plurality of slits 781 and 782 for leaking irradiation light from the backlight to the back side.

Next, the liquid crystal display device 780 is described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal display device according to the eighth embodiment.
The liquid crystal display device 780 includes housings 783 and 787, a liquid crystal panel 785, and a backlight 786. The housing 783 and the housing 787 form a box (substantially rectangular parallelepiped) by fitting, and house a liquid crystal panel 785 and a backlight 786 therein. The housing 783 is provided facing the front of the gaming machine 10, and the housing 787 is provided facing the back of the gaming machine 10. The housing 783 has a frame shape having a front opening 784, and allows the display area of the liquid crystal panel 785 to face the front side of the gaming machine 10 from the front opening 784.

  The liquid crystal panel 785 is provided with the backlight 786 on the back side, and displays an image in a display area using irradiation light from the backlight 786. The backlight 786 includes a light source (not shown) and a light diffusing unit, and irradiates the liquid crystal panel 785 with light with uniform illuminance. The housing 787 has a box shape and accommodates and protects the liquid crystal panel 785 and the backlight 786. The housing 787 covers the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 785 so that the backlight 786 efficiently irradiates the liquid crystal panel 785 with light. The housing 787 includes a plurality of (for example, three) slits (upper slits) 781 arranged in a row in an upper part, and a plurality (for example, three) slits (lower slits) 782 is arranged in a row in a lower part. Prepare.

  The slit 781 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper edge of the housing 783, and the slit 782 is provided at a position corresponding to the lower edge of the housing 783. Therefore, the slits 781 and 782 are provided avoiding the back of the front opening 784 of the housing 783. Thereby, the liquid crystal display device 780 can display a suitable image even if it has the slits 781 and 782.

The slits 781 and 782 can leak a part of the irradiation light of the backlight 786 to the back side of the gaming machine 10 from the opening.
Next, an arrangement relationship between the liquid crystal display device 780, the game control device 100, and the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cross section passing through one of the lower slits, the game control device, and the effect control device in the liquid crystal display device.

  The front frame 12 includes an attachment base 788, and supports the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 via the attachment base 788. The game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 may be supported by separate mounting bases.

  The game control device 100 accommodates the game control board 510 in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and is formed of a transparent member. The game control board 510 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 510 is a two-layer board having a front surface as a component mounting surface and a back surface as a solder surface. The game control board 510 includes a required number of connectors 794 and components on a component mounting surface. The connector 794 faces the outside of the board box 520 from a window portion provided in the board box 520 and serves as a connector with a predetermined harness.

  The effect control device 300 accommodates the effect control board 511 in the board box 790. The substrate box 790 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and is formed of a transparent member. The game control board 511 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 510 is a multilayer board having a front surface, a back surface, and a component mounting surface. The effect control board 511 includes a required number of connectors 791 and components. The connector 791 faces the outside of the board box 790 from a window portion provided in the board box 790 and serves as a connector with a predetermined harness.

  The liquid crystal display 780 is supported by the front frame 12 via a mounting base (not shown). Note that the liquid crystal display device 780 may be supported by the front frame 12 via the mounting base 788 similarly to the game control device 100 and the production control device 300.

  The liquid crystal display device 780 includes a slit 782 having a height w1. In the liquid crystal display device 780, a backlight 786 is arranged on the extension of the opening of the slit 782 so that light can appropriately leak from the slit to the back side of the gaming machine 10. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 780 prevents the display area of the liquid crystal panel 785 from being positioned over the extension of the opening of the slit 782, thereby preventing the slit 782 from deteriorating the visibility of an image. In the liquid crystal display device 780, an upper edge portion of the housing 783 is arranged on the extension of the opening of the slit 782 so that the slit 782 cannot be viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 780.

  The light leaked from the slit 782 illuminates the back side of the gaming machine 10 within the range of the light beams L1 and L2. The gaming machine 10 arranges a gap (width w2) between the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 in an irradiation range of the leakage light from the slit 782. Since the mounting base 788 is formed of a transparent member, light leaked from the slit 782 passes through the mounting base 788 and irradiates the back side of the gaming machine 10. Further, since the board box 520 is formed of a transparent member, light leaked from the slit 782 passes through the board box 520 and irradiates the game control board 510 and the connector 794. Further, since the board box 790 is formed of a transparent member, light leaked from the slit 782 passes through the board box 790 and irradiates the effect control board 511 and the connector 791. Such leakage light from the slit 782 illuminates the back side of the gaming machine 10 within a range (width w3) that is not blocked by the game control board 510 or the effect control board 511.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 facilitates observation of the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 by light leaking from the slit 782. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates observation of the game control board 510 and the effect control board 511 by light leaking from the slit 782. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates observation of the connector 791 and the connector 794 by light leaking from the slit 782. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates observation of a harness connected to the connector 791 and a harness connected to the connector 794 by light leaking from the slit 782. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates observation of the other area on the back surface side of the gaming machine 10 due to light leaking from the slit 782. Such a gaming machine 10 has a simple configuration and improves workability in a gaming machine installation environment. Although the slit 782 has been described, the operability in the gaming machine installation environment can be improved for the slit 781 in other ranges as well.

  Next, cable (harness) routing of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a view illustrating an example of the cable routing of the game control device according to the eighth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 has a slit irradiation light observation area 796 in the hatched area around the game control device 100 because the board box 510 transmits the light leaked from the slit 782 and the game control board 510 blocks the light. In the gaming machine 10, the harness connected to the connector 894 of the game control device 100 is set in a cable routing area 797. The cable routing area 797 is realized by the locking portions 798, 799 regulating the routing direction of the harness connected to the connector 894 of the game control device 100. The cable routing area 797 is on the game control board 510 and above the connector arrangement area. This suppresses the harness connected to the connector 894 of the game control device 100 from covering the slit irradiation light observation area 796. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not require that all the cables do not interfere with the slit irradiation light observation region 796. The gaming machine 10 allows a necessary cable to interfere with the slit irradiation light observation region 796, and restricts an unnecessary cable from interfering with the slit irradiation light observation region 796.

Next, a first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of how the game control board according to the first modification of the eighth embodiment looks when observed.
The game control board 800 includes an information display area 801 at an end. The information display area 801 has an information display pattern 802 formed of a conductor pattern in a GND pattern solid portion surrounded by a GND pattern 803. For example, the information display pattern 802 displays the manufacturer name “Ko, Inc.”. The information display pattern 802 is not limited to a manufacturer name, but may be other information such as a manufacturer name, a board management number, or the like, and may include not only one but also two or more pieces of information. .

  The GND pattern 803 and the information display pattern 802 block the irradiation light from the back, but the solid part of the GND pattern transmits a part of the irradiation light from the back. The information display area 801 is arranged within a slit irradiation light observation area 804 where light leaking from the slit 782 is irradiated from the back. Thus, when the gaming machine 10 cannot rely on the light source irradiating the surface of the game control board 800, the gaming machine 10 can observe the information display pattern 802 by relying on the light leaking from the slit 782.

Next, a second modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example of a slit irradiation target according to Modification 2 of the eighth embodiment.
The slit 781 irradiates the ball channel 810 of the gaming machine 10 from the back surface by the leak light. The spherical flow channel 810 includes a transmission observation window (transmission window) 811 that transmits light from the back surface to the front surface. The transmitted light transmitted through the transmission observation window 811 is shielded by game balls flowing down the ball flow path 810. Accordingly, the slit 781 enables the state of the game ball to flow down in the ball channel 810 to be observed even in a dark place.

  In the gaming machine 10, the observation target due to the light leaked from the slit 781 is the spherical flow path 810, but the observation target is not limited to this. The gaming machine 10 can observe another structure (for example, a movable portion such as a decoration device, a ball feeding device, or the like) whose operation state can be confirmed by light leaking from the slit 781.

  As described above, light leaked from the slits 781 and 782 can improve workability in a gaming machine installation environment with a simple configuration without lowering the illumination performance of the intended use. The positions, shapes, and numbers of the slits 781 and 782 may be arbitrarily changeable.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described eighth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a liquid crystal display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 780), a first substrate (for example, a game control substrate 510) disposed on the back side, and a gap with the first substrate. And a second board (for example, effect control board 511) disposed on the back side. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal panel (for example, a liquid crystal panel 785), a backlight (for example, a backlight 786) serving as a light source of the liquid crystal panel, and a liquid crystal panel that is exposed from a front opening (for example, a front opening 784). And a housing for housing the light (for example, housings 783 and 787). The housing is provided with slits (for example, slits 781 and 782) that leak light emitted from the backlight to the back side at positions facing the gap between the first substrate and the second substrate (see FIG. 106).

  Note that the above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In this case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the processing functions are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disk, a magneto-optical recording medium, and a semiconductor memory. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. The optical disk includes a DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), a DVD-RAM, a CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes an MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

  When distributing the program, for example, portable recording media such as DVDs and CD-ROMs on which the program is recorded are sold. Alternatively, the program may be stored in a storage device of a server computer, and the program may be transferred from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. Note that the computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Further, the computer can also execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

  Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, but may include, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use a game ball, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

  The disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and a modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Amusement machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

A liquid crystal display device arranged with the display unit facing the front side,
A first substrate disposed on the back side,
A second substrate disposed on the back side with a gap from the first substrate;
Including
The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal panel, a backlight serving as a light source for the liquid crystal panel, and a housing for housing the backlight while allowing the liquid crystal panel to face from a front opening,
The housing includes a slit that leaks outgoing light from a backlight to the back side at a position facing a gap between the first substrate and the second substrate.
Gaming machine.

Images